Output Solutions Printer C I 8 0 6 0 User Manual

User´s Manual  
C I - 8 0 6 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Regulations  
The printer PP 806 (CI - 8060) fulfills the safety regulations according to UL  
1950 and  
VDE (IEC 950) and CNA/CSA C22.2 / No. 950 for computer systems.  
The mains cable must be connected to a ground protected wall-socket. The  
selected voltage of the printer needs to fit to the local voltage.  
The power plug must be easily accessible at any time so that it can be  
disconnected immediately in case of danger or for maintenance purposes.  
Comme le câble de secteur sert de dipositif d'arrêt-urgence, sa connexion à l'im-  
primante doit être tout le temps accessible.  
Before installing the printer, check the surrounding conditions in which the  
printer will be placed (see next page, Operating Environment).  
During a thunderstorm you should never attempt to connect or disconnect any  
data transfer cables.  
The power supply should only be opened and checked by authorized personnel.  
Repairs and maintenance may only be attempted by authorized personnel as  
well. Repairs done inappropriately may cause damage and severe danger for  
the user.  
There is a warning symbol to draw the user's attention to possible injuries:  
This symbol is visible when the rear cover has been  
opened. It indicates that the print head is extremely  
hot after long periods of printing.  
Ce signal de danger se présente quand le cache  
derrière de l´imprimante soit retiré pour indiquer que  
la tête d´impression peut être extrèmement chaude  
après imprimer très longtemps.  
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Regulations  
Electromagnetic Compatibility  
We certify that the equipment at issue,  
Type: Printer PP 806 (CI - 8060)  
corresponds to the law regulations ruling electromagnetic compatibility of ap-  
pliances (89/336/EWG) and, therefore, fulfills the requirements for conformity  
marking with the CE-sign.  
For standard printer with serial and parallel interface (Ser/Par PM) please note:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed  
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may  
cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-  
stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on. The user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of  
the following measures:  
S
S
S
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from the  
circuit to which the receiver is connected.  
S
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
For printer with all other interface please note:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed  
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful inerfe-  
rence in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his  
own expense.  
II  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Regulations  
Shielded interface cables should be used with this unit to ensure compliance  
with Class B limits.  
Changes and modifications not explicitly allowed by the equipment's  
manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.  
Changes et modifications pas expressément approuvés par le producteur  
peuvent dévaluer l'autorité d'opérer l'équipement.  
Operating Environment  
Avoid installing the printer where it is exposed to moisture or heat (eg. direct  
sunlight).  
S
S
S
Temperature:  
+ 10 °C to + 35 °C (+50 °F to +95 °F)  
20% to 80%  
Humidity:  
Humidity with Automatic  
Sheet Feeder (ASF):  
30% to 70%  
III  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Regulations  
Power On/Off - Lever  
To switch the printer on or off push the Power On/Off - Lever always down.  
Power - On  
Power -  
Off  
Lifting the On/Off - Lever to the zero position won’t switch off the printer. Push  
the On/Off - Lever always down for switching on or off.  
IV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XI  
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XI  
1.Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
1.1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
1.2 Requirements to the location of the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
S Environment Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
S Prconditions for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
S Power Requiremens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
1-3 Remove Transport Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
S
Re-packing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
1.4 Installing thePersonality Module (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
1.5 Mains Connection and Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
1.6 Ribbon Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
1.7 Replacing the Ribbon Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
1.8 Paper Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
1.8.1 Paper Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
1.8.2 Fanfold Paper Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
1.8.2 Manual Sheet Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
1.9 Test-Print Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14  
S Sample: PRINT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15  
S Sample:CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16  
S Sample: PRINT LETTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17  
S Sample: PRINT LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18  
1.10 Connecting to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19  
S Parallel/Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19  
1.11 Installing the Printer Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19  
1.12 Emulation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20  
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
2.  
Printer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
2.1 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
2.2 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
2.2.1 Ready Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
2.2.2 Local Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
2.3 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
2.4 Menu Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
2.4.1 To Activate the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
2.4.2 To Confirm Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
2.4.3 How to Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
3.  
Configuring the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
3.1 What is Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
3.2 Standard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
3.3 Explanation of the Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
3.4 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
3.5 Menu Item Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
5.5.1 Test Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
3.5.2 Select Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
3.5.3 Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
3.5.4 Paper Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
3.5.5 Print Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
3.5.6 Page Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
3.5.7 Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
3.5.8 Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
3.5.9 Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
3.5.10 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
3.5.11 Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
3.5.12 Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
3.5.13 Left Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
3.5.14 Right Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
3.5.15 Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
3.5.16 Perforation Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
VI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
3.5.17 Tear Off Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
3.5.18 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15  
3.5.19 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
3.5.20 Recall Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
3.5.21 Program Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
3.5.22 Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
4
Description of the Individual Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
4.1 TEST MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
4.2 DEFINE MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SELECT MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
PAPER SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
PAPER EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
PRINT POS. ADJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
PAPGE LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
PRINT QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
FONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
EMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
CHARACTER SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
LEFT MARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
RIGHT MARGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
LINE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
PERF. SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
TEAR OFF MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
4.3 INTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
S
INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
I/F TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
WORD LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
BAUD RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
PARITY BIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
DSR / CTS MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
I / F BUFFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
S
S
S
S
LANGUAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
RECALL FACTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
PROGRAM UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
MENU ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
VII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
5
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
S Preferred Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
5.1 Cleaning the Platen and Surrounding Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
S PRINT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
5.2 Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
S Unlock procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
5.3 User Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
5.3.1 Print Head Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
5.3.2 Installing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
6.  
Trouble Shooting and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
- How to Use this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
6.1 Power-related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
6.2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
6.3 No Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
6.4 Operation-related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
6.5 Print-related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
6.6 Ribbon or Carriage-related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
6.7 Print Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
6.8 Diagrams for Failure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
6.8.1 Locking Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
6.8.2 Ribbon Unfasten Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
6.8.3 Ribbon Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
6.8.4 Remove Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15  
6.8.5 Paper Jam TRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16  
6.8.6 Paper Jam ASF or Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
6.8.7 Gap Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18  
VIII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
7
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
7.1 Printer Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
7.2 Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassettes (ASF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
7.2.1 Checking the Delivery Consignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
7.2.2 Prepare the ASF Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
7.2.3 Installing the ASF Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
7.2.4 Removing the ASF Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
7.2.5 Inserting Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8  
7.3 Replacement of the ASF Pick-up Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
7.3.1 To Remove the ASF Pick-up Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
7.3.2 To Install the Pick-up Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
7.4 Cut Sheet Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
7.4.1 Installing the Cut Sheet Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
8.  
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
8.1 Printer Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
8.2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
8.3 Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
8.3.1 Tractor Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
8.3.2 Manual Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
8.4 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
8.4.1 Optional Personality Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6  
8.5 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7  
8.5.1 Printer Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7  
S Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassette A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7  
S Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassette B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
IX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
Appendices  
Appendix A System Interface Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
1 Serial Interface RS 232C / RS 422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
1.1 Interface Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
1.2 Transmission Protocols and Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
1.2.1 DTR - Ready / Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
1.2.2 XON / OXOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5  
1.2.3 Serial Interface with RS-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7  
2 Parallel Centronics® Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8  
2.1 Interface Signal Defination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8  
2.2 Interface Characteristics - Connector Pin assignment . . . . . . . . A-9  
2.3 Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10  
3 Shared Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Appendix C Character Set Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 / ESC/P2 Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1  
Appendix G Miscellaneous  
Information for the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1  
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Preface  
About this Manual  
This manual covers the printer in combination with an interface module (Perso-  
nality Module).  
The Personality Module (PM) is an integral part of the printer, and the type of PM  
used significantly influences the behaviour or operation of the printer.  
The structure of this manual is such that the operator is led step-by-step through  
the various procedures. It starts with the unpacking and setting-up, moves on to  
detailed instructions for operating the printer and ends with the mounting of  
options.  
The manual is divided into the following chapters:  
1.  
Getting Started  
This chapter covers the unpacking and setting-up of the printer and the  
installation of the PM (Personality Module) and ribbon cassette. By the end  
of this chapter the printer should be fully functional and tested in its primary  
form. It is not yet connected to the host computer system and no options  
are mounted.  
2.  
3.  
Operating the Printer  
This chapter discusses in great detail the operation of the operator panel,  
all menu functions, and the general operation of the menu.  
Configuring the Printer  
This chapter explains how to configure the printer so that it can  
communicate with the corresponding system environment. Then this  
chapter thoroughly describes the printer's operating controls. In the last  
part you will find tables with the possible values of the menu items.  
XI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
4.  
5.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
In this chapter you will find a detail explanations of individual menu items.  
Maintenance  
This chapter shows how to clean the printer and how to replace the print  
head.  
6.  
7.  
Trouble Shooting and Diagnostics  
suggests how to identify and correct simple problems.  
Options  
This is a brief description of all available options. Supplements enclosed in  
the packaging of options may be inserted here.  
8.  
Technical Data  
All technical details or data about the printer can be found here.  
Appendix  
A. Interface Description  
This chapter gives hints about possibilities to connect the printer to the  
various computer systems and explains particularities depending on the  
version of the operating system. Additionally, cable connection is  
illustrated.  
B. Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
C. Character Set Table  
All printer supported character sets are listed in this chapter.  
XII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
D. Control Codes  
Quick reference for IBM Proprinter and IBM Proprinter AGM (4207, 4208  
XL 24) Emulation.  
E. Control Codes  
Quick reference for EPSOM LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Emulation.  
F.  
Control Codes  
Quick reference for Barcode programming.  
G. Miscellaneous  
S System Manager Information  
XIII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Conventions Used in this Guide  
The following conventions are used:  
Bold  
Headlines and important information.  
Note:  
Contains special advice to facilitate handling.  
Caution:  
Contains important information to prevent damage  
of the equipment.  
[ENTER]  
Key functions are always depicted in brackets or  
you will find the symbol of the key e.g  
.
Abbreviations and Acronyms  
ASF  
DRAFT  
EE  
Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassette for cut sheets and form sets  
Draft Quality  
Eastern European  
High Speed Draft  
Liquid Crystal Display  
Light Emitting Diode  
Letter Quality  
HSD  
LCD  
LED  
LQ  
MACRO User defined group (1 bis 4) of stored parameter  
NLQ  
PH  
Near Letter Quality  
Print Head  
PM  
Interface (Personality Module)  
XIV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Getting Started  
1.1  
Unpacking  
Check each item against the check list detailed below. Contact your supplier  
immediately if any item is missing or damaged.  
The package contains the printer and a box (1):  
Note: Save all packing material and boxes for future transportation of the  
printer.  
The box (1) contains an additional smaller box (2) with the interface (Personality  
Module, PM).  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
The box (1) contains the following:  
First shelf:  
S
S
S
S
Ribbon Cassette (4)  
Quick Reference Guide (5)  
CD-ROM (6)  
Power cord (7)  
Take the parts (4) to (7) out of the package (1) and open the second cover (3).  
Second shelf:  
Take out the Paper Insertion Guide (8) and the Manual Sheet Feeder (9).  
Lowest shelf:  
Turn the box (1) and remove the smaller PM box (2) (see page before).  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Check each item against the check list detailed below. Contact your supplier  
immediately if any item is missing or damaged.  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Printer (1)  
Paper Insertion Guide (2)  
Manual Sheet Feeder (3)  
Two Tractor Cassettes (4)  
Quick Reference Guide (5)  
Power Cord (6)  
Personality Module (PM) (7)  
Ribbon Cassette (8)  
CD-ROM (9)  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.2  
Requirements to the location of the printer  
Environmental Conditions  
S
S
S
Install the printer in an area away from any heat source, air conditioner, or  
strong airflow.  
Avoid installing the printer where it is exposed to moisture or heat (eg. direct  
sunlight).  
Avoid installing the printer in a dusty or humid environment.  
Preconditions for Installation  
S
S
Place the printer on the stand or a table.  
When processing fanfold paper always place the printer with its front edge  
slightly off the edge of the table.  
Power Requirements  
S
S
No special wiring is required. A typical office wall outlet is sufficient.  
Do not plug into the same wall outlet other equipment besides the printer  
such as coffee machines, copy machines, or air conditioners.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.3  
Remove Transport Lock  
Remove all transport locks (4) of the tractor cassettes.  
Open the rear cover (2) by pressing the two locking buttons (1) and swivel the  
rear cover backwards.  
3
Remove the transport lock (3) for the print head carriage.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Re-packing Information  
To ensure maximum protection when transporting the printer, always:  
S
S
S
S
S
Remove any installed paper handling option.  
Remove the mains cable.  
Remove the ribbon cassette.  
Reposition the transport lock.  
Pack the printer in its original packing material and ship in its original  
package.  
1.4  
Installing the Personality Module (PM)  
The printer is only operational when an interface is installed, called a Personality  
Module (PM). The illustration below shows the standard PM with a serial and  
parallel interface.  
Note: Never attempt to install or remove a PM while the printer is switched ON.  
To avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge, do not touch the pins or  
components of the PM.  
S
Insert the Personality Module (1) with the component side upwards until the  
connector fully engages. Hand tighten the two lock screws (2).  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.5  
Mains Connection and Power On  
S
S
S
Connect the printer to the mains using the power cord. First connect the  
cable to the power cord socket and then to the mains.  
Do not plug into the same wall outlet other equipment besides the printer  
such as coffee machines, copy machines, or air conditioners.  
The power On/Off lever switches the printer‘s power supply ON or OFF.  
Note: Press the lever always down.  
Since the power cord serves as a safety cut-off, its connection to the  
printer must be accessible any time.  
When switched ON the printer performs an internal self-test which checks the  
electronics, the print head carriage movement, and the interface. Power ON is  
indicated by a green LED on the operator panel, the first panel message is  
TEST.... .  
If the message UNLOCKED - CHECK RIBBON ... is shown, follow the steps in  
on page paragraph 1.6 Ribbon Installing.  
After inserting the ribbon press  
to continue. When the internal test has  
been completed successfully the display shows READY 1 ELQ or  
LOCAL 1 ELQ if data have already been transmitted.  
Note: If the display shows anything different please refer to chapter 6 Trouble-  
shooting and Diagnostics.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.6  
Ribbon Installation  
Note: It is recommended to use only original ribbon cassettes supplied by the  
printer manufacturer. Using other ribbons will void your warranty.  
The following procedure describes how the ribbon cassette is installed into the  
printer for the very first time. Lateron chapter 1.7 Replacing the Ribbon  
Cassette is applicable.  
Note: The prind head must be always in the park posirtion.  
Open the rear cover (2) of the printer by pressing simultaneously the two lokking  
buttons (1) and swivel the rear cover backwards.  
park position  
S
Pull the right and left arm (7) of the ribbon cassette (3) to the bottom and  
move the ribbon feed guide (4) into the fixing device (5) at the side.  
3
7
5
4
7
Note: The ribbon feed guide (4) has to slide into the fixing device (5). The  
ribbon shall not be tensed.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
S
Slide the ribbon cassette (3) into the printer.  
S
Close the rear cover (2) and lock the printer (Press  
).  
1.7  
Replacing the Ribbon Cassette  
Caution: The print head may be very hot immediately after printing!  
S
S
S
S
To install the ribbon, the printer must be powered on.  
Put the printer into the Local Mode. (Press ).  
Unlock the rear cover (2). (Press ).  
Open the rear cover (2) of the printer by pressing simultaneously the two  
lokking buttons, see picture on page before.  
Swivel the rear cover backwards.  
S
S
Remove Ribbon Cassette.  
For further steps see chapter 1.6 Ribbon Installation.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.8  
Paper Loading  
There are three possibilities for paper feeding:  
S
S
S
Fanfold paper with the two tractor cassettes;  
Single sheets through the manual paper path;  
With the automatic sheet feeder cassettes (ASF-Cassettes, optional). For  
further information please refer to chapter 7.2 ASF Cassettes.  
1.8.1 Paper Source Selection  
The basic selections for PAPER SOURCE are:  
S
S
TRACTOR (Default TRACTOR LOWER, indicated by )  
MANUAL  
Select 'TRACTOR L/U' as paper source on the operator panel  
The following diagram shows which keys to press and what is displayed on the  
operator panel.  
Power the printer ON:  
KEY  
DISPLAY  
[OFFLINE]  
[MENU]  
[DOWN]  
[RIGHT]  
[DOWN]  
[RIGHT]  
[DOWN]  
[ENTER]  
[ONLINE]  
LOCAL  
1 ELQ  
TEST MODES  
DEFINE MACRO  
» SELECT MACRO  
» PAPER SOURCE  
» TRACTOR LOWER  
» TRACTOR L/U  
» TRACTOR L/U  
READY  
º
º
º
º
r
r
1 ELQ  
Note: The settings selected and confirmed are only active until the printer is  
switched off. In order to prevent losing your new settings you can save  
them using the function SAVE MENU (see chapter 2.4.3 How to Save  
Settings.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.8.2 Fanfold Paper Feeding  
Note: Ensure that all transport locks are removed.  
S
S
The printer has to be placed at the front edge of the table or on the printer  
stand as described in chapter 7.1 Printer Stand.  
Remove the manual sheet feeder(1)  
S
Insert the lower (2) or the upper (3) tractor cassette, or both.  
S
Step 1: Adjust the tractors roughly to the paper width.  
Note: The left tractor is in a fix position.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
S
S
Step 2: Open the tractor covers, insert the paper, and close the tractor  
covers.  
Move the right tractor (1) until the paper is straight but not too tight.  
S
Insert the Manual Sheet Feeder (4) and initiate a test printout, see chapter  
1.9 Test Printouts to check the margins.  
4
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.8.3 Manual Sheet Feeding  
S
Insert the Manual Sheet Feeder (1) and connect it to the paper insertion  
guide:  
1
S
S
Select the paper source MANUAL using either the menu function or by  
means of the corresponding command in your application program, see  
chapter 1.8.1 Paper Source Selection.  
Initiate a printout, see chapter 1.9 Test Printouts.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.9  
Test Printouts  
There are four test printouts available.  
S
S
S
S
PRINT MENU shows the current settings of all parameters and the contents  
of the macros.  
CONFIGURATION lists all available fonts and indicates the page counter va-  
lue.  
PRINT LETTER produces a standard letter (ECMA-132) which can be used  
for measuring the printer’s throughput.  
PRINT LINES shows a pattern of all printable characters. Use this to check  
the print qiality as well as the top and left margin.  
The following steps show which keys to use to start a test printout.  
The printer feeds paper from the defined paper source (default TRACTOR  
LOWER).  
KEY  
DISPLAY  
LOCAL  
[OFFLINE]  
[MENU]  
[RIGHT]  
[ENTER]  
[ONLINE]  
1 ELQ  
TEST MODES  
º
» PRINT MENU (or other printout)  
» PRINT MENU  
r
r
PRINT MENU  
(starts printing)  
» PRNITMENU  
[FORM FEED]  
[ONLINE]  
TEAR OFF PAPER  
(short displayed)  
» LOCAL  
READY  
1 ELQ  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Sample: PRINT MENU  
PRINT OUT FW-VERSION 20xxxxxx HW-VERSION 29xxxxxx FPGA 4.7 PAGE COUNT 50  
INTERFACE  
I/F TYPE  
PARALL./RS232  
8 BIT  
WORD LENGTH  
BAUD-RATE  
PARITY BIT  
PROTOCOL  
DSR/CTS MODE  
I/F BUFFER  
9600 BIT/S  
EVEN  
DTR  
IGNOR. DSR+CTS  
64 KBYTE  
MENU ACCESS  
FULL ACCESS  
CURRENT SETTINGS  
MACRO 1*  
MACRO 2  
MACRO 3  
MACRO 4  
PAPER SOURCE TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER  
PAPER EXIT  
PATH  
BATCH  
-
BATCH  
-
BATCH  
-
BATCH  
-
BATCH  
-
BATCH CAPACITY  
PRINT POS. ADJ.  
TRACT.L. V-POS  
TRACT.L. H-POS  
TRACT.U. V-POS  
TRACT.U. H-POS  
MANUAL V-POS  
MANUAL H-POS  
BIN 1 V-POS  
BIN 1 H-POS  
BIN 2 V-POS  
BIN 2 H-POS  
BIN 3 V-POS  
BIN 3 H-POS  
PAGE LENGTH  
FONT QUALITY  
GRAPHICS QUALITY  
FONT  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
72 LINES  
LQ  
72 LINES  
LQ  
72 LINES  
LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
72 LINES  
LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
72 LINES  
LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
EPSON LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
EPSON LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
EPSON LQ  
PITCH  
LINE  
EMULATION  
IBM PROPR. IBM PROPR. AGM  
CARACTER SET  
EPSON EXT. GCT EPSON EXT. GCT  
IBM SET 2  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
IBM SET 2 EPSON EXT. GCT  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
LEFT MARGIN  
RIGHT MARGIN  
LINE MODE  
PERF. SKIP  
TEAR-OFF-MODE  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Note: An asterisk () after MACRO 1 indicates the actual macro  
The values after FW- and HW-VERSION indicates the actual release.  
All this standard settings of the firmware will be restored with the menu function  
RECALL FACTORY.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Sample: CONFIGURATION  
CONFIGURATION  
FW-VERSION  
202xxxxx  
PAGE COUNT  
126  
C031 ISO 8859/1  
C062 IBM SET 2  
C100 CODE PAGES EE  
CO32 ISO 8859/15  
C063 IBM CODE PAGE  
C101 CODE PAGES EE2  
C061 IBM SET 1  
C071 EPSON EXT. GCT  
DATA  
ROMAN  
NLQ  
ROMAN  
LQ  
NLQ  
LQ  
LQ  
LQ  
SAN SERIF  
COURIER  
SCRIPT  
OCR A  
NLQ  
SAN SERIF  
PRESTIGE  
SCRIPT  
LQ  
NLQ  
NQ  
COURIER  
PRESTIGE  
OCR B  
LQ  
NLQ  
LQ  
ORATOR-C  
NLQ  
ORATOR-C  
ORATOR  
NLQ  
ORATOR  
LQ  
DATA LARGE  
LQ  
ZEICHENSATZ :  
EPSON EXT. GCT  
1: U.S.A.  
PRINTHEAD NEEDLE  
1 2  
3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24  
DATA  
DRAFT  
$ !"#$%&'()*+,-./01234567890:;<=>?@ABCDEF.......  
.
.
The value after FW-VERSION indicates the actual release of the firmware.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Sample: PRINT LETTER  
Eilzustellung  
Norddeutsche Farbwerke KG  
Herrn Dr. Grauert  
Große Elbstraße 64  
2000 Hamburg 4  
Org. III 5/37  
H-A  
4 34  
22.04.75  
17.04.75Volkmann  
Vordruckgestaltung für den allgemeinen Schrift-  
verkehr, für das Bestell- und Rechnungswesen  
E i l t  
Sehr geehrter Herr Dr. Grauert,  
Sie können das Schreiben der Briefe, Bestellungen, Rechnungen usw.  
sowie das Bearbeiten des Schriftguts rationalisieren, wenn die  
Vordrucke Ihres Unternehmens den folgenden Normen entsprechen:  
DIN 676 Geschäftsbrief; Vordrucke A4  
DIN 677 -; Vordruck A5  
DIN 679 Geschäftspostkarte; Vordrucke A6  
DIN 4991 Vordrucke im Lieferantenverkehr; Rechnung  
DIN 4992 -; Bestellung (Auftrag)  
DIN 4993 -; Bestellungsannahme (Auftragsbestätigung)  
DIN 4994 -; Lieferschein/Lieferanzeige  
DIN 4998 Entwurfsblätter für Vordrucke  
Diese Normen enthalten alle Einzelheiten für den sinnvollen und  
zweckmäßigen Aufdruck. Wenn dazu bei der Beschriftung genormter  
Vordrucke DIN 5008 'Regel für Maschinenschreiben' beachtet wird,  
entstehen übersichtliche und werbewirksame Schriftstücke.  
Die beifgefügten 6 Mustervordrucke zeigen, daß das Beachten der  
Normen die künstlerische und werbewirksame Gestaltung der Vor-  
drucke nicht ausschließt.  
Da wir uns auf die Herstellung genormter Vordrucke spezialisiert  
haben, können wir besonders billig liefern. Eine Probestellung  
wird Sie und Ihre Geschäftsfreunde von den Vorteilen überzeugen.  
Mit bester Empfehlung  
NORAG  
Druckerei und Verlagshaus KG  
Herrmann  
Anlagen  
6 Mustervordrucke  
Note: By pressing the key  
the print job will be interrupted and then with  
and terminated.  
the following key sequence  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Sample: PRINT LINES  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§  
§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!  
!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789  
9!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz012345678  
89!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz01234567  
789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456  
6789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz012345  
56789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz01234  
456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123  
3456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz012  
23456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz01  
123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0  
0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
z0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxy  
yz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwx  
xyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw  
wxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuv  
vwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstu  
uvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrst  
tuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrs  
stuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr  
rstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopq  
qrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnop  
pqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmno  
opqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmn  
nopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklm  
mnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijkl  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijk  
klmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghij  
jklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghi  
ijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefgh  
hijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefg  
ghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdef  
fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcde  
efghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcd  
defghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabc  
cdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZab  
bcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789!§ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZa  
Note: By pressing the key  
the print job will be interrupted and then with  
and terminated.  
the following key sequence  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.10 Connecting to the System  
Parallel/Serial Interface  
S
S
Switch the printer and the computer OFF.  
Connect the interface cable coming from the computer to the printer's  
parallel (1) or serial (2) port.  
The following values are default settings, see test printout PRINT MENU on  
page 1-15  
S
S
S
S
S
S
Word Length:  
Baud-Rate  
Parity Bit:  
8 bit  
9600 BPS  
Even  
Protocol  
DTR  
DSR/CTS Mode  
I/F Buffer  
Ignore DSR+CTS  
64 K-Byte  
After powering the printer ON both interfaces, serial and parallel, are available  
for data transfer because of the shared mode. The port to which data is sent  
becomes active automatically.  
For changing the parameters, see Appendix A System Interface Description  
1.11 Installing the Printer Drivers  
S
You will find the printer drivers on the CD-ROM.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
1.12 Emulation Selection  
The following emulations are included in the PM Ser/Par:  
S
S
S
S
EPSON LQ / ESC/P2  
IBM ProPrinter XL 24  
IBM ProPrinter XL 24 AGM  
EPSON LQ / ESC/P2  
in Macro 1 (Default)  
in Macro 2  
in Macro 3  
in Macro 4  
To change from one emulation to another, follow the procedure below. The ex-  
ample shows the keys to press along with the display information for a change  
from EPSON LQ / ESC/P2 in Macro 1 to IBM ProPrinter in Macro 2.  
Switch the printer ON. The display shows READY 1 ELQ.  
KEY  
DISPLAY  
LOCAL  
[OFFLINE]  
1 ELQ  
[MACRO SELECTION]  
MACRO 2  
r
(hold the key down and the available marcos are scrolling in the  
display and stop pressing with selected Macro 2)  
[ONLINE]  
READY  
2 IPP  
The information READY 2 IPP indicates the selected macro and the  
emulation of this macro, for example:  
1 ELQ  
2 IPP  
Macro 1 with Epson Emulation  
Macro 2 with IBM Proprinter Emulation  
Macro 3 with IBM Proprinter AGM Emulation  
Macro 4 with Epson Emulation.  
3 AGM  
4 ELQ  
Note: A “Macro“ is a summary of application specific parameter settings. It is  
possible to have a total of four macros, each with a different summary of  
VALUE settings.  
The settings selected and confirmed are only active until the printer is  
switched off. In order to prevent losing your new settings you can save  
them using the function SAVE MENU (see chapter 2.4.3 How to Save  
Settings.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Printer Operation  
Mos of the printer functions could be executed via operator panel as well as via  
software commands from the host system. Some functions become only  
effective with Operator Panel keys, for example: locking/unlocking the printer.  
2.1 Operator Panel  
The Operator Panel  
S
S
S
S
controls the set-up for communication with the host computer;  
controls various parameter settings;  
allows manual control of the paper handling;  
gives information about the printer's status.  
1
2
3
4
LCD Display  
Online / Offline  
LED  
Lock / Unlock Cover  
Lock/ Unlock Print Head  
Macro Selection  
Form Feed  
5
6
7
Curser Keys for Navigation  
in the Menu Mode  
The LCD Display (1) indicates the current status of the printer. If any error  
occurs (e.g. UNLOCKED - ... CHECK RIBBON) the corresponding error  
message will be displayed. The green LED (3) lights only if the printer is  
powered on and in the Ready Mode.  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
2.2 Function Keys  
If the printer is powered on, the display shows READY 1 ELQ and the green  
LED lights. The printer is in the Ready Mode.  
The printer works in two different modes, the Ready Mode and the Local Mode.  
To put the printer into the Local Mode, press the Online / Offline-key  
.
Ready Mode  
In this mode only the red [Online/Offline] key is active and the green LED lights.  
By pressing the key the printer changes into the Local Mode and the green  
Online-LED extinguishes. Further information see chapter 2.2.1.  
Local Mode  
Depending on the state of the printer the three leftmost keys have multiple  
functions. The functions are displayed by keeping the appropriate key pushed.  
Release the key as soon as the desired function is displayed. Further  
information see chapter 2.2.2 .  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
KEY  
DISPLAY  
[Form Feed]  
EJECT PAPER 1)  
INSERT MANUAL1)  
INSERT TRACTOR1)  
INSERT TRACTOR U(pper)1)  
INSERT TRACTOR L(ower)1)  
PAPER TEAR OFF  
PAPER PARK  
FORM FEED  
REV. FORM FEED  
[Macro Selection]  
MACRO 1  
MACRO 2  
MACRO 3  
MACRO 4  
[Lock Cover/  
LOCK COVER  
Unlock Cover]  
UNLOCK COVER  
UNLOCK COVER/ PH  
Note:  
PH means Print Head  
The following keys have only one function:  
KEY  
FUNCTION  
[Online / Offline]  
After pressing this key, the printer enters the  
ONLINE or OFFLINE mode.  
[Menu]  
[Enter]  
MENU key - to enter the Menu Mode in the first  
level.  
A selection can be confirmed. To cancel the  
selection, choose another item and press [ENTER]  
again. The selection becomes effective by pressing  
the [ONLINE/OFFLINE] key. Behind the actual  
displayed parameter appears an asterisk (*).  
1
) depends on paper source  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
KEY  
FUNCTION  
[Cursor]  
As soon as the menu mode has been  
activated, the four keys can only be used as  
cursor keys to move within the menu tree.  
Up, Down, Right, and Left Key  
2.2.1 READY Mode  
In the READY mode only the [Online/Offline] key has a function:  
After pressing that key the printer enters the LOCAL mode.  
2.2.2 LOCAL Mode  
All keys have at least one function. If one key has multiple functions they can  
displayed by keeping that key pushed:  
Note: The corresponding display messages are shown on page before.  
After pressing that key the printer enters the READY mode  
1) Rear cover is locked:  
S
S
Short pressing: Unlocking the rear cover.  
Long pressing: Unlocking the rear cover and the print head.  
2) Rear cover is unlocked:  
S
Pressing the key: Locking the rear cover (and the print head).  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
Single sheet:  
only form feed function. Either the form is fed into print position  
or is ejected.  
S
Fanfold Paper:  
1) Paper is in Park Position  
S
paper is fed into print position.  
2) Paper is in Print Position  
S
S
paper is fed to the tear off position.  
paper is fed into park position.  
3) Paper is in Tear Off Position  
S
S
printer performs a form feed  
paper is fed into park position (for this function the paper has  
to be torn off)  
S
printer performs a reverse form feed  
The four macros are displayed by keeping the key pushed. The  
actual macro is displayed first. Release the key as soon as the  
desired macro is displayed. This one will be come the active one.  
How to confirm and save the selection see chapter 2.4.3 How to  
Save Settings.  
Press the [Menu] key to activate the menu mode. The four arrows  
(up, down, right, and left) can be used as cursor keys to move within  
the menu tree. The menu tree is shown and explained on the  
page Menu-1.  
To leave the menu mode press this key again  
With this key a selection will be confirmed. To cancel the selection  
choose another item and press [Enter] again. The selection becomes  
effective by pressing the [Online/Offline] key.The selection remains  
active until the printer is powered off. If the selection should be  
available after power off it must be saved by means of the menu  
function „SAVE MENU“ see chapter 2.4.3 How to Save Settings.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
2.3  
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)  
The LCD indicator gives information about the status of the printer. In general it  
can be distinguished between:  
S
S
ONLINE messages  
OFFLINE messages  
Note: Messages which exceed the 16 character display, e.g. error messages,  
are horizontally scrolled.  
The green LED lights when the printer is in the ONLINE mode and the display  
shows:  
READY  
1 ELQ  
When the printer is in the OFFLINE mode status information, error messages, or  
menu messages are displayed.  
Example: The display contents after powering the printer on without a ribbon  
cassette.  
Because of the error case the printer switches into the Offline Mode.  
Switch the printer on. The printer performs an internal test:  
TEST  
The green LED is flashing and after a short moment the following term is  
displayed:  
UNLOCKED  
Note: In an error case the printer switches into the Offline Mode.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
And then, the message is scrolled:  
- CHECK RIBBON.....  
Insert the ribbon cassette, seechapter 1.6 Ribbon Installation and press  
.
The display shows:  
LOCKING COVER  
After the locking procedure the display shows:  
LOCKED  
In this state it is possible to use all keys.  
The printer is still in the OFFLINE Mode due to the previous error condition is  
cleared now. Press  
and the printer switches into the ONLINE Mode.  
READY  
1 ELQ  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
2.4  
Menu Mode  
All selectable features are accessible via the operator panel and combined in  
the printer MENU.  
This feature provides:  
S
S
S
easy configuration (language, etc.)  
quick parameter changes  
activation of test functions  
There are three entry points:  
S
S
TEST MODES  
(4 test printouts and a Hexdump-function are available)  
(1 of 4 macros can be selected and its contents  
defined)  
DEFINE MACRO  
S
INSTALLATION  
(installation specific parameters can be defined)  
SAVE MENU is another function at the first level of the menu tree which allows  
to save all selections permanently in a non-volatile memory.  
The menu is organized in three levels:  
S
S
S
Level 1  
Level 2  
Level 3  
Main Functions  
Subfunctions  
Parameters and values  
Level 1 (main functions) is entry point into the menu.  
There is only one main function in level 1 without an entry into a lower level,  
SAVE MENU.  
In Level 2 (subfunctions) menu functions can be activated or a group of values  
can be choosen.  
In Level 3 (parameters and values at the lowest level) all menu items can be  
selected/activated.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
2.4.1 To Activate the Menu  
To activate the menu please follow the next steps:  
Press  
:
The printer changes from the READY mode into the LOCAL mode.  
The display shows:  
LOCAL  
1 ELQ  
Note: The second term identifies the active macro and the emulation.  
Press  
:
Now, the printer enters the menu mode at the first level of the menu tree.  
The display shows:  
TEST MODES  
º
Note: As soon as the menu mode has been activated the arrow keys are  
useable as cursor keys to navigate within the menu tree (up, down, right,  
and left).  
Pres  
or  
:
Arrow down or arrow up are used within one level to shift menu functions into  
the display. The keys have a wrap around function.  
DEFINE MACRO  
º
Press  
:
The display shows:  
» SELECT MAKRO º  
Now, you are at the Subfunction level.  
Note: Movement in both directions is possible. Arrow right is used to enter the  
next lower level and arrow left is used to enter a higher level.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
Press  
:
The display shows:  
» PAPER SOURCE º  
Press  
:
Now, you are at the third level. The display shows:  
» TRACTOR L/U  
r
The default value for PAPER SOURCE is TRACTOR L/U (lower or upper). At the  
lowest level, parameters and values, the asterisk (*) to the right indicates the  
actual selection.  
To change this parameter into paper source MANUAL,  
press twice  
.
The display shows:  
» MANUAL  
Press  
to confirm the choice:  
The display shows:  
» MANUAL  
r
To quit the menu mode press  
.
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
2.4.2 To Confirm a Selection  
press ; the confirmed value is marked with an asterisk ( r ) at the last  
position as shown in the picture before.  
S
Note: All cursor keys have an autorepeat function.  
The menu mode is left either by pressing  
FUNCTION level and then pressing the  
or by moving to the MAIN  
key.  
A number of VALUE settings is summarized in a "Macro". Four macros are  
available, each with a different contents of VALUE settings. The standard  
emulations are assigned to the macros in following manner:  
Macro  
Emulation  
1
2
3
4
Epson LQ ESC/P2  
IBM Proprinter XL 24E  
IBM Proprinter XL 24E AGM  
EPSON LQ ESC/P2  
Macro parameters can be tailored to specific application requirements. This  
feature is highly beneficial in case of frequent changes between applications in a  
multi-user environment. Instead of having to adjust the menu settings every time  
before a particular application is started, the user just selects the macro  
containing the pre-defined set-up configurations.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Operating  
2.4.3 How to Save Settings  
The settings selected and confirmed are only active until the printer is switched  
off. In order to prevent from losing your new settings you can save them using  
the Main Function SAVE MENU.  
KEY  
[OFFLINE]  
Display  
LOCAL  
1 ELQ  
[MENU]  
[UP]  
TEST MODES  
SAVE MENU  
º
[ENTER]  
SAVING NOW  
r
(display is flashing)  
[ONLINE]  
READY  
1 ELQ  
Note: The values of the "current settings" and the macro contents can be  
printed using the function PRINT OUT.  
1
2
3
4
LCD Display  
Online / Offline  
LED  
Lock / Unlock Cover  
Lock/ Unlock Print Head  
Macro Selection  
Form Feed  
5
6
7
Curser Keys for Navigation  
in the Menu Mode  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Configuring the Printer  
3.1  
What is Configuring  
This chapter describes how to use the operator panel and menu settings to set  
up or configure your printer so that the printer and your computer system can  
communicate correctly with each other.  
Communication between the two requires that both the computer operating sy-  
stem and the printer have the same communication settings or features. The  
most important of those are:  
S
S
S
S
S
protocol,  
baud rate,  
word length,  
I/F type,  
parity.  
You may also need to change some of the printer's other features depending on  
your hardware and application requirements, for example:  
S
paper handling  
S text processing.  
The MENU mode allows you to access the configuration memory. All settings of  
the printer are stored in this memory and can be printed. The possible settings  
are discribed in detail on the following pages. A short view of all Menu settings  
you will find in chapter 3.5 Menu Item Description, and a detail descriotion in  
chapter 4 Explanation of Individual Menu Items.  
The standard pameter setting can be printed by using the function PRINT  
MENU. The following steps show which keys to use to start this printout.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
Key  
Diyplay  
[OFFLINE]  
LOCAL  
1 ELQ  
[MENU]  
TEST MODES  
» PRINT MENU  
» PRINT MENU  
PRINT MENU  
º
[RIGHT]  
[ENTER]  
[ONLINE]  
r
r
After feeding paper from the defined paper source the printer starts to print.  
When printing is completed the following message will be displayed:  
» PRINT MENU  
[FORM FEED]  
[ONLINE]  
PAPER TEAR OFF  
(short displayed)  
» LOCAL  
READY  
1 ELQ  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.2  
Standard Configuration  
The standard Configuration (factory default values) is reflected in the following  
pintout.  
PRINT OUT FW-VERSION 20xxxxxx  
INTERFACE  
HW-VERSION 29xxxxxx FPGA 4.7  
PAGE COUNT 50  
I/F TYPE  
PARALL./RS232  
8 BIT  
WORD LENGTH  
BAUD-RATE  
PARITY BIT  
PROTOCOL  
DSR/CTS MODE  
I/F BUFFER  
9600 BIT/S  
EVEN  
DTR  
IGNOR. DSR+CTS  
8 KBYTE  
MENU ACCESS  
FULL ACCESS  
CURRENT SETTINGS  
MACRO 1*  
MACRO 2  
MACRO 3  
MACRO 4  
PAPER SOURCEE TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER TRACTOR LOWER  
PAPER EXIT  
PATH  
BATCH  
-
BATCH  
-
BATCH  
-
BATCH  
-
BATCH  
-
BATCH CAPACITY  
PRINT POS. ADJ.  
TRACT.L. V-POS  
TRACT.L. H-POS  
TRACT.U. V-POS  
TRACT.U. H-POS  
MANUAL V-POS  
MANUAL H-POS  
BIN 1 V-POS  
BIN 1 H-POS  
BIN 2 V-POS  
BIN 2 H-POS  
BIN 3 V-POS  
BIN 3 H-POS  
PAGE LENGTH  
FONT QUALITY  
GRAPHICS QUALITY  
FONT  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
72 LINES  
LQ  
72 LINES  
LQ  
72 LINES  
LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
72 LINES  
LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
72 LINES  
LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
EPSON LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
EPSON LQ  
STANDARD  
DATA  
10 CPI  
6 LPI  
EPSON LQ  
PITCH  
LINE  
EMULATION  
IBM PROPR. IBM PROPR. AGM  
CARACTER SET  
EPSON EXT. GCT EPSON EXT. GCT  
IBM SET 2  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
IBM SET 2 EPSON EXT. GCT  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
1: U.S.A.  
1. COLUMNS  
165. COLUMNS  
LF=LF, CR=CR  
YES  
LEFT MARGIN  
RIGHT MARGIN  
LINE MODE  
PERF. SKIP  
TEAR-OFF-MODE  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Note: An asterisk () after MACRO 1 indicates the actual macro  
The values after FW- and HW-VERSION indicates the actual release.  
All this standard settings of the firmware will be restored with the menu function  
RECALL FACTORY.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.3 Explanation of the printout on the previous page  
in the headline behind the term VERSION the revision level of the printer's  
firmware can be found.  
Then, two columns of hardware related settings follow:  
INTERFACE - for communication between the computer operating system and  
the printer it is necessary to have the same protocol settings.  
S I/F TYPE  
PARALL./RS232  
8 BIT  
S WORD LENGTH  
S BAUD-RATE  
S PARITY BIT  
S PROTOCOL  
S DSR / CTS MODE  
S I/F BUFFER  
9600 Bps  
EVEN  
DTR  
IGNOR. DSR+CTS  
64 KBYTE  
There is no automatic protocol sensing.  
The last part of the printout is a list of all MACRO settings.  
In this case MACRO 1 is marked with an asterisk (*) which identifies it as the  
active macro.  
Whenever you make modifications in the active macro without saving them you  
will find the new settings under the heading CURRENT SETTINGS. Unless they  
are saved, the modifications will stay active only until the printer is switched off.  
When the printer is switched on again the macro settings marked with the  
asterisk will be reactivated.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.4  
Menu Tree  
1
)
The cassette types BIN 1 up to BIN 3 are  
only displayed if the ASF cassettes are  
installed.  
2
)
The next level displayed:  
BATCH  
MANUAL  
Note: for detail settings of the possible parameters see next tables and the description in chapter 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.5  
Menu Item Description  
The following tables show menu modes, submenus and parameters.  
Precondition is: Access to all menu items is alloved. (MENU ACCESS = ALL)  
Otherwise restrictions are to observed.  
An asterisk (i ) indicates the factory settings. For detail settings see chapter  
4 Explanation of Individual Menu Items.  
3.5.1 Test Modes  
Entry Point = TEST MODES  
Selection  
Function  
PRINT MENU  
CONFIGURATION  
Printout of the current settings  
List of all available fonts, the firmware version, and  
the page counter value  
PRINT LETTER  
PRINT LINES  
HEX DUMP  
Produces a standard letter (ECMA-132)  
Shows a pattern of all printable characters  
Pintout including all control characters  
3.5.2 Select Macro  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Value  
SELECT MACRO  
MACRO 1  
MACRO 2  
MACRO 3  
MACRO 4  
r
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.5.3 Paper Source  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Parameter  
PAPER SOURCE  
TRACTOR LOWER  
TRACTOR L/U  
r
TRACTOR UPPER  
MANUAL  
1
ASF BIN 1  
)
ASF BIN 2  
ASF BIN 3  
ASF BINS 1/2  
ASF BINS 2/3  
ASF BINS 1/2/3  
1
)
The cassette types ASF BIN 1 up to ASF BIN 3 are only displayed if the ASF  
cassettes are installed.  
3.5.4 Paper Exit  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO º PAPER EXIT  
Selection  
Parameter / Value  
PATH  
BATCH  
r
MANUAL  
BATCH CAPACITY  
BATCH CAP. )  
(range: ) ; 20 up to 600; steps = 20)  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.5.5 Print Position Adjustment  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO º PRINT POS. ADJ.  
Selection  
Parameter / Value  
TRACT.L. V. 0.0  
(Range: -24.0 up to 99.9; Step: 1/6 inch)  
TRACT.L. H. 0.0  
(Range: -6.0 up to 6.0; Step: 1/10 inch)  
TRAKT.U. V. 0.0  
(Range: -24.0 up to 99.9; Step: 1/6 inch)  
TRACT.U. H. 0.0  
(Range: -6.0 up to 6.0; Step: 1/10 inch)  
MANUAL V. 0.0  
(Range: -1.5 up to 24.0; Step: 1/6 inch)  
MANUAL H. 0.0  
(Range: -6.0 up to 6.0; Step: 1/10 inch)  
BIN 1 V. 0.0  
(Range: -1.5 up to 24.0; Step: 1/6 inch)  
BIN 1 H. 0.0  
(Range: -6.0 up to 6.0; Step: 1/10 inch)  
BIN 2 V. 0.0  
(Range: -1.5 up to 24.0; Step: 1/6 inch)  
BIN 2 H. 0.0  
(Range: -6.0 up to 6.0; Step: 1/10 inch)  
BIN 3 V. 0.0  
(Range: -1.5 up to 24.0; Step: 1/6 inch)  
BIN 3 H. 0.0  
(Range: -6.0 up to 6.0; Step: 1/10 inch)  
TRACT.L. V-POS  
r
Tractor Lower Vertical Position  
TRACT.L. H-POS  
r
Tractor Lower Horizontal Position  
TRACT.U. V-POS  
r
Tractor Upper Vertical Position  
TRACT.U. H-POS  
r
Tractor Upper Horizontal Position  
MANUAL  
Manual Vertical Position  
MANUAL H-POS.  
Manual Horizontal Position  
BIN 1 V-POS.  
Bin 1 Vertical Position  
BIN 1 H-POS.  
Bin 1 Horizontal Position  
BIN 2 V-POS.  
Bin 2 Vertical Position  
BIN 2 H-POS.  
Bin 2 Horizontal Position  
BIN 3 V-POS.  
Bin 3 Vertical Position  
BIN 3 H-POS.  
Bin 3 Horizontal Position  
V-POS.  
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.5.6 Page Length  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Value  
PAGE LENGTH  
72 Lines  
r
(Range: 1 up to 144 Zeilen)  
3.5.7 Print Quality  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO º PRINT QUALITY  
Selection  
Parameter  
FONT QUALITY  
LQ / NLQ  
(DRAFT for font DATA)  
GRAPHICS QUAL.  
STANDARD  
WIN.LQ  
r
180 DPI  
90 DPI  
60 DPI  
WIN.NLQ  
WI.DRAFT  
3.5.8 Font  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Parameter  
FONT  
DATA  
r
ROMAN  
LQ / NLQ  
SANS SERIF LQ / NLQ  
COURIER  
PRESTIGE  
SCRIPT  
LQ / NLQ  
LQ / NLQ  
LQ / NLQ  
LQ  
OCR B  
OCR A  
LQ  
ORATOR-C  
ORATOR  
DATA LARGE  
LQ / NLQ  
LQ / NLQ  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.5.9 Pitch  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Value  
PITCH  
10 CPI  
r
12 CPI  
15 CPI  
17 CPI  
18 CPI  
20 CPI  
PROPORTIONAL  
3.5.10 Line  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Value  
LINE  
2 LPI  
3 LPI  
4 LPI  
6 LPI  
8 LPI  
12 LPI  
r
3.5.11 EMULATION  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Value  
EMULATION  
EPSON LQ  
r
IBM PROPR.  
IBM PROPR. AGM  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.5.12 Character Set  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO º CHARACTER SET  
Selection  
Value/ Parameter  
ISO 8859/1  
ISO 8859/15  
IBM SET 1 / IBM SET 2  
1: U.S.A.  
r
2: FRANCE  
3: GERMANY  
4: U.K.  
5: DENMARK  
6: SWEDEN  
7: ITALY  
8: SPAIN  
9: JAPAIN  
10: NORWAY  
11: DENMARK 2  
12: SPAIN 2  
13: LATIN AM.  
14: TURKEY  
IBM CODE PAGE  
EPSON EXT. GCT  
1: PAGE 437  
2: PAGE 850  
3: PAGE 860  
4: PAGE 863  
5: PAGE 865  
6: PAGE 858  
r
r
1: U.S.A.  
2: FRANCE  
3: GERMANY  
4: U.K.  
5: DENMARK  
6: SWEDEN  
7: ITALY  
8: SPAIN  
9: JAPAIN  
10: NORWAY  
11: DENMARK 2  
12: SPAIN 2  
13: LATIN AM.  
14: TURKEY  
15: LEGAL  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
Selection  
Value/ Parameter  
CODE PAGE EE  
1: CP 437 GK  
2: CP 851 GK  
3: CP 928 GK  
4: CP 855 CYRI  
5: CP 866  
6: CP 869  
7: CP 852  
8: KAMENICKY  
9: ISO LATIN 2  
10: MAZOVIA  
11: CP 437 HUN  
12: CP 852 SEE  
13: CP 866 LAT  
14: CP WIN LAT2  
CODE PAGE EE2  
1: CP 771  
2: CP 773  
3: CP 774  
4: CP 775  
5: BALTIC RIM  
3.5.13 Left Margin  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Value  
LEFT MARGIN  
1. POSITION  
r
(Range: 1 up to 16; Step 1/10 inch)  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.5.14 Right Margin  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Value  
RIGHT MARGIN  
136. POSITION  
165. POSITION  
80. POSITION  
132. POSITION  
r
(measuring unit 1/10 inch))  
3.5.15 Line Mode  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Value  
LINE MODE  
LF = LF, CR = CR  
LF = LF + CR  
r
CR = LF+CR  
LF, CR = LF + CR  
3.5.16 Perforation Skip  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Parameter  
PERF. SKIP  
YES  
NO  
r
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.5.17 Tear Off Mode  
Entry Point = DEFINE MACRO  
Selection  
Wert / Parameter  
TEAR-OFF-MODE  
NO  
r
TEAR-OFF 10 S.  
TEAR-OFF 1 S.  
3.5.18 Interface  
Entry Point = INSTALLATION º INTERFACE  
Selection  
Parameter / Value  
I/F TYPE  
PARALL. / RS232  
PARALL. / RS422  
PARALLEL  
r
1
WORD LENGTH  
)
7 BIT  
8 BIT  
r
r
1
BAUD-RATE  
)
1200 BPS  
2400 BPS  
4800 BPS  
9600 BPS  
19200 BPS  
38400 BPS  
PARITY BIT  
PROTOCOL  
EVEN  
ODD  
r
NONE  
DTR  
r
XON / XOFF  
XON / XOFF + DTR  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
Selection  
Parameter / Value  
DSR / CTS MODE  
IGNOR. DSR+CTS  
DSR+CTS ACTIVE  
CTS ACTIVE  
r
r
DSR ACTIVE  
BUFFER  
64 KBYTE  
32 KBYTE  
8 KBYTE  
1 KBYTE  
1
)
Only indicated if the serial (RS232 or RS422) interface is selected.  
3.5.19 Language  
Entry Point = INSTALLATION  
Selection  
VALUE  
LANGUAGE  
ENGLISH  
DEUTSCH  
FRANCAIS  
r
3.5.20 Recall Factory  
Entry Point = INSTALLATION  
Selection  
Function  
RECALL FACTORY  
All standard default settings of the firmware will be  
restored but not saved.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Printer  
3.5.21 Program Update  
Entry Point = INSTALLATION  
Selection  
Function  
PROGRAM UPDATE  
A new firmware version can be down loaded from  
the host system via the interface cable. All  
parameters will be reset to their factory default  
value.  
3.5.22 Menu Access  
Entry Point = INSTALLATION  
Selection  
Parameter  
MENU ACCESS  
FULL ACCESS  
NO ACCESS  
r
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Description of the Individual Menu Items  
Main Functions and Entry Points into the menu  
The following Main Functions are available:  
S
S
S
S
TEST MODES  
There are 4 test printouts and the hexdump function available. (For detail  
information see chapter 4.1 beginning on the next page).  
DEFINE MACRO  
Behind this menu point there are all functions and parameters to define a  
macro. (For detail information see chapter 4.2).  
INSTALLATION  
In the first Sub Function named INTERFACE you can manipulate parameters  
to enable communication with the host. (See Chapter 4.3).  
SAVE MENU  
Any desired changes to the default settings can be saved here. After power  
on the new settings are activated.  
While this function is operating the display flashes SAVING NOW.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
4.1  
TEST MODES  
PRINT MENU  
S
This test printout shows the current settings of all parameters and the  
contents of the macros. This printout is helpful for future reference and when  
macros are to be changed. For detail see chapter 3.2 Standard  
Configuration.  
S
S
CONFIGURATION  
This test printout lists all available fonts, contains the page count to identify  
the actual number of printed pages, and gives information on technical  
releases which are intended for service purposes. A sample you will find in  
chapter 1.9 PRINT MENU.  
PRINT LETTER  
This test printout produces a standard letter (ECMA-132) which can be used  
for measuring the printer's throughput. See a sample in chapter 1.9 PRINT  
MENU.  
S
S
PRINT LINES  
Tis test printout shows a pattern of all printable characters. Use this to check  
if the printer operates correctly. See a sample in chapter 1.9 PRINT MENU.  
HEX DUMP  
This function allows to analyze that the data received by the printer. Control  
codes are no longer carried out, instead all data is printed in hexadecimal  
format and as ASCII characters. Any non-printable characters, such as  
carriage return are only represented as a single dot (.) in the ASCII list.  
It may happen that the transmission of data to the printer will be interrupted  
during Hex Dump. In this case, printing of data received after the break is  
started on the next available line. The result is an irregular right margin which  
is not an indicator for any loss of data.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
4.2  
DEFINE MACRO  
SELECT MACRO  
S
To select one of the four macros which can be used for quickly changing the  
printer settings for different applications. For example: Application A needs  
fanfold paper with a top margin of one, application B processes fanfold paper  
in a batch with a top margin of six. Simply by pressing Macro Selection key  
the macro containing the information for the specific application  
requirements can be activated.  
S
PAPER SORCE  
The printer offers three choices for paper source:  
S
S
S
TRACTORT (fanfold paper)  
MANUAL (single sheet)  
ASF CASSETTES (optional)  
They can be accessed either individually or bundled in a pool. Any  
combination of cassettes can be selected.  
Note: Please refer to chapter 8 Technical Data, for detailed media  
specifications.  
S
PAPER EXIT  
It is possible to define PATH and BATCH CAPACITY. The desired paper exit  
can be selected via operator panel or software.  
S
Parameters of PATH  
BATCH (default) and MANUAL are selectable.  
MANUAL is for single sheet only with output to the front.  
S Values for BATCH CAPACITY are in the range from ) (for no setting =  
default); and 20 up to 600 in steps of 20.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
S
PRINT POS. ADJ.  
This function adjusts the print position in the current macro for the six  
different paper paths TRACT. L.V-POS, TRACT. L.H-POS,  
TRACT.U.V-POS, TRACT. U.H-POS, MANUAL V-POS, MANUAL H-POS or  
ASF BIN x V-POS, ASF BIN x H-POS (x = 1 up to 3) to exactly position the  
printout in relation to the top edge of the form in use. It is meant to be a  
corrective parameter to compensate variations in paper size and pre-printed  
material.  
This parameter covers a range of:  
S
S
S
S
fanfold vertical:  
-24.0 up to 99.9 in steps of 1/6 inch,  
- 6.0 up to 6.0 in steps of 1/10 inch  
- 1.5 up to 24.0 in steps of 1/6 inch,  
fanfold horizontal:  
manual or bins vertical:  
manual or bins horizontal: - 6.0 up to 6.0 in steps of 1/10 inch  
where "-" is up the page and "+" is further down the page.  
Caution:  
The set up of PRINT.POS.ADJ. will become effective on the next  
page of the form. Therefore, it is recommended to define  
PRINT.POS.ADJ. as long as the paper is in the park position and  
before starting the print job.  
S
PAGE LENGTH  
Page length is expressed in terms of lines within the range of 1 to 144 lines.  
Any page length setting is based on six lines per inch, regardless of the  
number of lines per inch selected in the line setting or defined by the  
application.  
The following table shows the number of lines for the most common paper  
sizes:  
Paper length in inches  
Appropriate setting in no. of lines  
4
24  
25  
36  
48  
51  
66  
70  
72  
4 1/6  
6
8
8 1/2  
11  
11 2/3  
12 (default setting)  
The page length setting is the basis from which perforation skip, TEAR-OFF  
and margins are calculated.  
An incorrect page length, therefore, leads to an incorrect perforation skip.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
S
PRINT QUALITY  
Is splitted up into:  
S
Font Quality  
Four different font quality levels can be selected:  
S High Speed Draft (font "Data")  
S Draft quality (font "Data")  
S Near letter quality (NLQ displayed with the font name)  
S Letter quality (LQ displayed with the font name).  
and  
Graphics Quality  
S
Four different graphics quality levels can be selected:  
S Standard  
S Win. LQ  
S Win. NLQ  
S WI. Draft  
180 DPI  
90 DPI  
60 DPI  
Different print qualities result in different print speed.  
S
FONT  
A font is a family of characters with the same style and size. The appearance  
of the font can be varied by using attributes such as: size, bold, italic, etc.  
The fonts included in the PM are:  
S
S
S
S
S
S
Data  
)
)
)
)
)
Roman  
Courier  
Script  
Sans Serif  
Prestige  
OCR B  
OCR A  
Orator  
Orator-C  
DATA LARGE  
see Appendix B for print samples.  
Note: The printtest CONFIGURATION lists all available fonts. The firmware of  
the printer comprises also barcodes. Detail information for printing bar-  
codes can be found in Appendix F Barcodes Quick Reference.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
S
Pitch  
Defines the number of characters printed per inch (10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20 or  
proportional).  
Any pitch setting can be combined with any available font. In some cases  
this might lead to a conflict with font designs. The pitch setting is, therefore, a  
matter of personal taste.  
S
S
LINE  
Determines the number of lines per inch (line space).  
EMULATION  
The emulation determines the set of commands available for the printer (see  
Appendix D and E). You can activate the following emulations:  
S
S
S
EPSON LQ / ESC/P2  
IBM PROPR.  
IBM PROPR. AGM  
The selected emulation is also part of the actual macro. With a change of the  
macro (e.g. key  
be changed.  
is pressed) it may happen that the emulation will also  
Be careful: Do not change the emulation within an application.  
.
S
CHARACTER SET  
When selecting a character set it can be further specified by the correspon-  
ding national versions.  
Detailed print samples are found in Appendix B and the Character Set  
Tables in Appendix C.  
If a different macro is selected the default character set may change as well.  
e.g.  
S
S
IBM PROPR. emulation has the character set IBM SET 2 as  
default.  
EPSON / EDC/P2 emulation has the character set EPSON  
EXT.GCT as default.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
S
LEFT MARGIN  
The left margin is set in 1/10" steps, depending on the actual selection. The  
first left margin position is 1/20" from the left edge of the paper which means  
that the letter H in regular "Data" font would be positioned 1/20" from the left  
edge of the paper. The left margin can be set to a maximum of 16/10".  
S
S
RIGHT MARGIN  
The right margin is set to print position 80, 132, 136, or 165, always  
measured from the position of the first possible, not actual, left margin  
setting.  
LINE MODE  
S
If LF = LF + CR is selected the printer performs a line feed and  
additionally a carriage return (CR) for every line feed (LF) received via  
the interface.  
S
If CR = LF + CR is selected the printer performs a carriage return an  
additionally a line feed (LF) for every carriage return (CR) received via  
the interface.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
S
PERF. SKIP  
If PERF. SKIP is set to YES the printer starts to print after the specified top  
margin and stops printing before the bottom margin.  
If PERF. SKIP is set to NO the printer ignores top and bottom margin and  
prints from the very first to the very last line. That means that on a standard  
11" paper 66 lines are available for printing.  
S
TEAR-OFF-MODE  
There are three possible settings within this mode:  
S
S
S
NO  
TEAR-OFF 10 S.  
TEAR-OFF 1 S.  
When TEAR-OFF is selected the printer waits for one or ten seconds and,  
unless further data are received, advances the paper to the first perforation  
behind the text.  
Regardless of this setting, whenever a change from fanfold to another paper  
source occurs the printer will request the fanfold paper to be torn off before  
the paper is moved into the park position.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
4.3  
INSTALLATION  
INTERFACE  
S
S
I/F TYPE (Interface Type)  
The following types are available:  
S PARALLEL / RS232  
S PARALLEL / RS422  
S PARALLEL  
In case the PARALLEL / RS232 or PARALLEL / RS422 interface type is  
selected the printer switches automatically between the parallel and  
serial interface. The first data received at the port determine which  
interface port becomes active. The other interface port will be closed so  
that only one interface is active at a time (for detailed information see  
Appendix A Interface Description).  
The factory setting for the interface type are: PARALL./RS232, 8 bit word  
length, 9600 baud rate, even parity bit, DTR protocol, ignore DSR+CTS,  
and 8 Kbyte Buffer.  
S
S
WORD LENGTH  
Number of bits that represent a word; values are 7 or 8 bit  
BAUD RATE (Only indicated if the serial interface is selected)  
Controls the speed of data transfer. Possible transfer rates are: 600,  
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bps.  
S
S
PARITY BIT (Only indicated if the serial interface is selected)  
The data transfer will be checked by an even or odd parity bit. The values  
are: EVEN, ODD, or NONE.  
PROTOCOL (Only indicated if the serial interface is selected)  
Selectable are: DTR, XON/XOFF, or XON/XOFF+DTR.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of the Individual Menu Items  
S
DSR/CTS MODE (Only indicated if the serial interface is selected)  
Selectable are: IGNORE DSR+CTS, DSR+CTS ACTIVE, CTS ACTIVE,  
or DSR ACTIVE.  
S
I/F BUFFER  
Buffer size in Kbyte. The maximum (factory setting) size is 64 Kbyte.  
S
S
LANGUAGE  
The operator panel may display its messages in three languages. Select one  
out of the following: ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, or FRANCAIS.  
RECALL FACTORY  
All standard default settings of the firmware will be restored. The contents of  
Page Counter and the Paper-in Adjust will not be changed. Use the function  
SAVE MENU if the standard settings shall be stored permanently.  
S
S
PROGRAM UPDATE  
A new firmware version can be down loaded from the host system via the  
interface cable. All parameters will be reset to their factory default value.  
MENU ACCESS  
There are two possibilities to define the user’s access rights to the menu.  
S
S
FULL ACCESS  
NO ACCESS  
All functions can be used (default)  
The menu is not accessible at all. Only the menu item  
TEST MODES is available.  
Note: It is the system manager’s responsibility to grant access to the menu  
when NO ACCESS was selected.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Maintenance  
Prefered Material  
The following materials and cleaning lubricants are recommended whem  
maintaining thr printer:  
S
S
Lint-free cloth  
Vacuum cleaner.  
5.1  
Cleaning Surrounding Areas  
The user should clean the printer every six months or after 50,000 prints,  
whatever occurs first. If you experience paper feed problems or if the print head  
carriage movement is hampered, cleaning should be carried out more often.  
Note: The Page Counter (PGCNT) in the PRINT MENU will inform about the  
actual number of printed pages (see illustration on the next page) .  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
PRINT MENU  
CONFIGURATION  
FW-VERSION 202xxxxxPAGE COUNT  
126  
C031 ISO 8859/1  
C062 IBM SET 2  
C100 CODE PAGE EE  
CO32 ISO 8859/15  
C063 IBM CODE PAGE  
C101 CODE PAGE EE2  
C061 IBM SET 1  
C071 EPSON EXT. GCT  
DATA  
ROMAN  
NLQ  
ROMAN  
LQ  
NLQ  
LQ  
LQ  
LQ  
SANS SERIF  
COURIER  
SCRIPT  
NLQ  
SANS SERIF  
PRESTIGE  
SCRIPT  
LQ  
NLQ  
NQ  
COURIER  
PRESTIGE  
OCR B  
LQ  
NLQ  
LQ  
OCR A  
ORATOR-C  
NLQ  
ORATOR-C  
ORATOR  
NLQ  
ORATOR  
LQ  
DATA LARGE  
LQ  
ZEICHENSATZ :  
EPSON EXT. GCT  
1: U.S.A.  
PRINTHEAD NEEDLE  
1
2
3
4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24  
DATA  
DRAFT  
$ !"#$%&'()*+,-./01234567890:;<=>?@ABCDEF.......  
.
.
Note: FW-VERSION indicates the revision level of the firmware.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
5.2  
S
Cleaning Procedure  
Power the printer ON:  
S
To open the rear of the printer :  
S
S
S
Press  
Press  
to change into the LOCAL mode.  
until UNLOCKED is displayed.  
Press the left and right unlocking buttons (1) simultaneously and open  
the rear cover (2).  
1
2
3
4
5
Locking Buttons  
Rear Cover  
Ribbon Cassette  
Print Head (in park position)  
Print Bar  
S
S
Remove the ribbon cassette.  
Thoroughly brush and vacuum all accessible areas to remove any paper  
particles and dust.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
S
Open the front cover of the printer:  
S
S
Remove the Manual Sheet Feeder, Tractor Cassettes, and the Paper  
Insertion Guide.  
Press the left and right plastic leads (4) and open the front cover (5).  
S
S
Clean the paper pressure rollers and the transport rollers.  
Clean the covers and the operator panel with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do  
not use cleaning solvents or excessive amounts of water.  
S
S
S
Insert the ribbon cassette (see chapter 1.6 Ribbon Installing).  
Close the front cover and press  
until LOCKED is displayed.  
Pressing causes the printer to enter the READY mode.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
5.3  
User Replaceable Parts  
The print head has an expected life time of approximately 600 Mio.  
characters.  
5.3.1 Print Head Exchange  
Note: The print head may be very hot immediately after printing.  
S
Power the printer ON:  
S
To open the rear of the printer :  
S
S
Press  
Press  
to change into the LOCAL mode.  
until UNLOCK COVER / PH is displayed. Now the rear cover  
and the print head are unlocked. (PH means print head).  
S
Release the rear cover (2) by pressing simultaneously the two  
lockingbuttons (1) and swivel the rear cover backwards.  
1
2
3
4
Locking Buttons  
Rear Cover  
Ribbon Cassette  
Print Head (in park position)  
S
S
Slide out the Ribbon cassette (3) to the rear.  
Power the printer OFF.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
S
Disconnect the print head cable (4) carefully by pullingblack the plastic  
holder (5) upwards.  
S
The loose print head cable remains on the plastic holder (5a).  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
S
Slide the print head (6) out of the fixation support.  
5.3.2 Installation procedure:  
Put the new print head (6) into its fixation support and slide it in.  
S
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
S
Put the plastic pin (7) into the hole (8) of the carriage for adjusting the  
print head cable.  
S
After finding the right position connect the print head cable by pressing  
the plastic holder down (with strong pressure).  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
S
Insert the ribbon cassette (3) and close the rear cover (2) of the printer.  
2
1
S
S
Power the printer ON.  
The LED is flashing and the display shows:  
UNLOCK ( CHECK RIBBON... ).  
S
S
Lock cover by pressing  
automatically.  
key . The print head will be locked  
Print out one test page to ensure that the printer works correctly after the  
print head replacement. See next page.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
KEY  
DISPLAY  
LOCAL  
1 ELQ  
[MENU]  
TEST MODES  
» PRINT MENU  
º
[ARROW RIGHT]  
[ARROW DOWN]  
[ENTER]  
» CONFIGURATION  
» CONFIGURATION  
r
r
[ONLINE]  
CONFIGURATION  
(start of the print out)  
» CONFIGURATION  
[FORM FEED]  
[ONLINE]  
PAPER TEAR OFF  
(short displayed)  
» STOP  
READY  
1 ELQ  
Note: If it doesn’t work open the printer again. Press print head cable and its  
connector once more together. Close the printer and repeat the test  
printout.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
How to Use This Section  
1. Find the category to which your problem belongs. The problem categories  
are:  
S
S
S
S
S
S
Power-related Problems  
Error Messages  
No Printout  
Operation-related Problems  
Print-related Problems  
Ribbon or Carriage-related Problems  
For example, if the print appears very light on the paper, look into Section  
"Print- related Problems".  
2. Find the symptom description that most closely matches the printer  
symptom. In this example you would look at the symptom "Print faint or of  
poor quality."  
3. Try the first suggestion under that head line.  
4. If the suggestion does not cure the problem try the next suggestion.  
5. If none of the suggestions enables you to continue printing or if the fault is  
not listed contact your service office.  
Each time the printer is switched ON the display indicates TEST while the  
internal self-tests are run. If the test is completed successfully READY 1 ELQ  
will be displayed. If an error message is displayed please refer to the following  
section.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.1  
Power-related Problems  
Power indicator does not light when power is switched On:  
S
Check that the power cord and plug are securely fitted to the printer and to a  
mains outlet.  
S
S
S
Ask for the power connector connections (and fuse) to be verified.  
Ask for the building electrical supply to be verified.  
PM correct inserted ?  
6.2  
Error Messages  
After switching the power ON the printer runs a self test. During the test the follo-  
wing messages may show up on the display:  
Display  
That means ...  
Cause  
No information, No power  
POWER ON  
S
Mains cable not connected.  
LED not not lit or .........  
S
S
PM not installed  
PM not property installed  
LED lit but no  
reaction  
Hang up in reset after  
power on  
S
S
print PSU defective  
Print CU-DEV defective  
After all tests have been passed successfully the following message will be  
displayed:  
READY 1 ELQ Printer is OK  
S
Printer ready for operation  
or  
BUSY 1 ELQ  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
During normal operation the following error messages may occur :  
Note: In an error case the printer change into the OFFLINE mode. After error  
correction press key to change back again into the READY mode.  
If an error correction is not possible call the service of your dealer!  
Display  
That means ...  
Cause / Action  
BUFFER OVERFLOW Handshake protocol  
error  
S
Check CTR - CTS or  
XON/XOFF protocol  
Check connector  
S
S
Repeat data transfer  
CARRIAGE ERROR  
Horizontal drive without S Paper jam  
function  
S
S
S
Print gap incorrect  
PCC-value too low  
Ribbon feed guide isn´t  
aligned with print head  
Horizontal drive blocked  
Encoder strip not in  
correct position  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Encoder strip is dusty  
Encoder strip missing  
Horizontal motor fault  
Print CU-DEV defective  
AGC procedure on not  
workable position  
S
No AGC ADJUST after  
print head replacement  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
Display  
That means ...  
Cause / Action  
CHECK TOF POS  
Perforation isn´t  
adjusted with the tear  
off edge  
S
Adjust the perforation of  
the form with the tear off  
edge by pulling the paper  
forwards or backwards  
Check if print head is in its  
park positon  
S
S
S
Ribbon cassette correct  
installed ?  
see also diagram 6.8.5  
Paper Jam TRF  
ELECTR-FAN ERROR Fan error  
S
S
Press  
key again  
Hardware error; call  
service  
FRAMING ERROR  
GAP ERROR  
Protocol error serial  
S
S
Check protocol setting of  
printer and host  
interface  
Repeat data transfer  
Print gap incorrect,  
green ribbon support  
not in right position  
S
S
Printer not locked  
Wrong distance between  
print head and print bar  
Pins of the green ribbon  
support broken  
S
S
S
Check if print head is in its  
park positon  
See also diagram  
6.8.7 Gap Error  
S
S
Error still there call service  
LOCK COVER  
Housing will be locked  
Wait  
MOTOR FAN ERROR H-motor fan error  
S
S
Press  
key again  
Hardware error; call  
service  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
Display  
That means ...  
Cause / Action  
PAPER JAM ASF  
There are obstructions  
in the paper path  
S
S
Remove any obstacles  
See also diagram  
6.8.6 Paper Jam ASF  
PAPER JAM MANUAL There are obstructions  
in the paper path  
S
S
S
Remove any obstacles  
Close front cover  
See also diagram  
6.8.6 Paper Jam Manual  
PAPER JAM TRF  
Tractor cassette:  
S
S
S
S
Feeding incorrect  
No paper feeding  
S
S
Check paper path  
Correct paper position?  
Not enough feeding S Paper movement wrong  
Too much feeding  
by tearing off  
After power on:  
No paper inserted  
S
S
S
S
Close front cover  
Insert paper  
See also diagram 6.8.5  
Paper Jam TRF  
PARITY ERROR  
Protocol error serial  
interface  
S
S
Check protocol setting of  
printer and host  
Repeat data transfer  
PRINT HEAD ERROR Problems with the print  
head incline  
S
S
No ribbon run  
Pins on print head  
carriage defective; call  
Service  
S
Unlock print head and  
lock it again (see diagram  
6.8.1 Locking Procedur)  
PROCESS TIMEOUT Firmware error  
S
S
S
Press  
key again  
Switch printer off and on  
Error still there, call  
service  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
Display  
That means ...  
Cause / Action  
REMOVE PAPER  
The paper sensor is  
covered  
S
S
Remove paper  
Close front cover  
RIBBON ERROR  
SYSTEM ERROR  
Ribbon problems  
S
S
S
Unlock printer  
Open printer  
Check ribbon cassette  
Problems with the  
S
S
Switch printer off and on  
Error still there, call  
service  
system or the firmware  
UNLOCKED -  
S
Horizontal drive  
without function  
S
S
S
Open printer  
CARRIAGE ERROR  
Check ribbon  
Check if print head is in its  
park positon  
S
Printer locking  
S
S
Lock printer (see diagram  
procedure faulty  
6.8.1 Locking Procedur)  
UNLOCKED COVER  
Rear cover will be  
unlocked  
Wait  
UNLOCKED -  
S
No ribbon cassette  
detected  
S
S
Check ribbon cassette  
Move print head into park  
position  
CHECK RIBBON ...  
S
Printer unlocked  
S
Lock printer (see diagram  
6.8.1 Locking Procedur)  
UNLOCKED -  
Ribbon problems  
S
S
S
Open printer  
RIBBON ERROR  
Check ribbon cassette  
Lock printer (see diagram  
6.8.1 Locking Procedur  
or 6.8.3 Ribbon Error)  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.3  
No Printout  
S
Self-test printout does not start  
S
S
S
Make sure that you have closed the cover.  
Check if paper is loaded in the printer.  
Refer to paragraph 1.8 Paper Loading.  
S
Printing does not start  
S
S
Make sure that the READY or BUSY message is displayed. If there is a  
different message displayed please look into the above error message  
table.  
Make sure that the printer is connected to the host computer. (Refer to  
paragraph 1.10 Connecting to the System). Make sure that connectors  
are properly fixed at both ends.  
S
S
Make sure that the printer is receiving data from the host computer.  
Make sure that the correct protocol is enabled. (Refer to page and  
appendix A Interface Description).  
S
Make sure that you have selected the correct port (if the shared mode  
has not been selected).  
S
S
S
S
Make sure that paper is loaded.  
Make sure that the ribbon is installed.  
Examine the ribbon path.  
The ribbon feed guides are not in the right posotion (see paragraph  
1.6 Ribbon Installation)  
S
S
Fanfold paper does not advance  
Make sure that the right paper tractor is selected.  
S
Single sheet paper does not advance  
S
Make sure that the paper source MANUAL or BIN x (x = 1 up to 3) is  
selected.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.4  
Operation-related Problems  
Paper is not positioned at perforation for tear-off  
S
S
S
Select the correct form length using the Set-up feature.  
Reset top of form by moving the paper into park position.  
S
Paper tears or jams  
S
S
S
Examine the paper path; remove any obstacles  
Is the paper too loose or too tight between the tractors?  
If the transport holes are deformed at their outer edges, the paper is too  
taut.  
S
S
If the paper rises between the tractors it is too loose.  
Readjust the tractor spacing so that the paper lies smoothly but without  
any tension.  
S
S
Ensure that the paper is horizontally aligned on the pins.  
Paper moves out of one tractor.  
S
S
S
Parking paper and resetting top of form  
S
S
S
S
Tear off the paper at the perforation.  
Press  
Press  
Press  
.
until the paper is in the park position.  
. Printing will resume at the top of the next form.  
Print head carriage does not move smoothly / does not move at all  
S
S
Examine the paper path. Remove any obstacles.  
Examine the carriage area for obstacles. Remove where necessary.  
Press the  
key when the paper path is cleared.  
S
Make sure that the transport lock has been removed.  
Single sheets are skewed  
S
S
Adjust ASF cassette paper guides.  
You will find more information in chapter 7.2 ASF Cassette.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.5  
Print-related Problems  
S
Print faint or of poor quality  
S
Do you use the right paper? See Chapter 8 Technical Data which con-  
tains the paper specification. Replace the paper if it does not comply to  
this specification.  
S
Does the ribbon need to be changed? Replace it by a new one if  
necessary.  
S
S
S
S
Is the ribbon cassette properly installed?  
Ribbon path not o.k. ?  
Print gap incorrect. Press  
twice.  
Coppies not dark enough. Don´t use old action paper!  
S
S
S
Characters are not printed evenly or are not uniform in pitch  
S
Examine the paper path for dirt or other obstacles that may cause the  
gap between print head and platen to vary. Remove the obstacles.  
Print lines overlap  
S
Examine the paper path for dirt or other obstacles. Remove the  
obstacles.  
Part of printed text is missing (loss of data)  
S
If you are using Serial communication channel check the buffer control  
setting in Set-up.  
S
Check the data flow control setting on the host computer.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
If the printout or the character set is not correct the following procedure can help  
to clear the situation.  
Action  
Result  
Check  
Select and start PRINT No print image or  
S
PAPER SOURCE  
TEST 1  
printout not complete  
No printing starts  
selection  
S
S
Ribbon condition  
Print head condition  
Stop SELF TEST and  
start external printing  
S
S
S
Printer ONLINE  
READY  
Interface cable for  
proper connection  
Interface selection  
Some characters not  
correct  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Emulation  
Character set  
National version  
Word length  
Baud rate  
Parity bit  
Protocol  
Font and/or pitch faulty  
Problem still there  
S
S
S
Font  
Pitch  
Line space  
S
Call service  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.6  
Ribbon or Carriage-related Problems  
Ribbon Problems  
S
S
Make sure that the ribbon is:  
S Properly tight  
S Not worn out or dry  
S Not torn or damaged in any other way  
S Not jammed  
S Ribbon turned over ?  
S
Carriage does not move smoothly  
S
Examine the paper path. Remove any obstacles. Check that all packing  
material is removed.  
S
Examine the carriage area for obstacles. Remove where necessary.  
6.7  
Print Tests  
There are four different print tests as well as one interface test built into the  
printer.  
Note: Detailed information about the print tests you will find in chapter 1.9 Test  
Printouts.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.8  
Diagrams for Failure Analysis  
6.8.1 Locking Procedure  
Error message:  
UNLOCKED -  
CHECK RIBBON....  
Rear cover closed ?  
Close rear cover and  
press  
Ribbon inserted ?  
Ribbon movable ?  
Print head in park position ?  
UNLOCKED -  
CARRIAGE ERROR  
No  
LOCAL  
displayed ?  
Open the rear cover, clean  
the encoder strip and control  
the position.  
Ribbon correctly inserted ?  
Is the green lever of the ribbon  
locked in its home position  
(right side) ?  
Yes  
UNLOCKED -  
CHECK RIBBON ...  
Check ribbon cassette and  
move printhead into park  
position  
UNLOCKED -  
GAP ERROR  
Open the rear cover  
Ribbon correctly inserted ?  
Is the green lever of the ribbon  
locked in its home position  
(right side) ?  
Green lever below the print  
head ?  
Press  
to continue  
Pins of the green ribbon  
support broken ?  
Note: Remove the ribbon cassette only, if the print head is in park position.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.8.2 Ribbon Unfasten Procedure  
Note: Remove the ribbon cassette only, if the print head is in park position.  
Print head  
park position  
Open rear cover  
Rear cover  
No  
No  
Print head in  
park position?  
Move print head to  
park position  
Yes  
Is it  
possible to  
remove the ribbon  
cassette ?  
Close rear cover, press  
to lock the printer.  
Yes  
No  
see 6.8.1 Locking  
Procedure  
OK ?  
Yes  
No  
OK ?  
Yes  
New  
ribbon cassette  
required ?  
No Fix ribbon leading at home  
position.  
Yes  
Close rear cover  
and press  
Replace the ribbon  
casstte  
Press  
to continue  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.8.3 RIBBON ERROR  
That means, that the printer has tried to tense the ribbon and to fix the ribbon  
feed guide into the fixing device. But there are still problems with the ribbon.  
Note: Remove the ribbon cassette only, if the print head is in park position.  
Print head  
park position  
Rear cover  
1)  
1) Park Postition: Print Head is on the most right side of the printer. (The view is  
from the front of the printer.)  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.8.4 REMOVE PAPER  
That means, that a sensor isn’t free from any obstructions:  
S
S
S
S
Paper remains are in the paper path.  
Front cover isn’t closed entirely.  
Sunlight shines directly to a sensor.  
Clean the sensors 1, 2 and 3 carefully.  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.8.5 PAPER JAM TRF (Tractor Feed)  
That means, that there are obstructions in the paper path.  
Note: Remove the ribbon cassette only, if the print head is in park position.  
Press  
CHECK TOF POS  
displayed  
No  
Visible paper  
jam ?  
Yes  
Perforation  
adjusted with Tear  
Off Edge ?  
No  
Open rear cover  
Remove paper  
entirely.  
Yes  
Remove any  
obstructions.  
Close cover and  
press  
No  
No  
Paper jam  
once more?  
Yes  
Possible to  
remove ribbon ?  
Release ribbon  
cassette  
Yes  
Remove paper and  
any obstructions  
entirely. Insert ribbon  
cassette. Close  
Press  
to continue  
Insert paper again  
cover and press  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.8.6 PAPER JAM ASF or MANUAL  
That means, that there are obstructions in the paper path.  
Note: Remove the ribbon cassette only, if the print head is in park position.  
Remove paper  
press  
to  
continue  
No  
READY  
displayed ?  
Yes  
No  
Possible to  
remove ribbon ?  
Load paper  
See ribbon unfasten  
procedure (6.8.2)  
Yes  
Press  
to continue printing  
Remove paper and  
any obstructions  
entirely. Insert  
ribbon cassette.  
Close cover and  
press  
No  
Paper  
jam again ?  
Press  
Yes  
to continue printing  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics  
6.8.7 GAP ERROR  
That means, that there are obstructions in the paper path.  
Note: Remove the ribbon cassette only, if the print head is in park position.  
Print head  
park position  
Rear cover  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Options  
7.1 Printer Stand  
Put the printer onto the stand:  
S
Look at the rear of the printer and put the metal bar (1) underneath the  
flange-rail (2) of the stand (3).  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
S
The printer is tightly locked with the stand.  
5
Note: The stand with a shelf for lower tractor (4) and a shelf for upper tractor (5)  
is an option.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
7.2  
Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassettes (ASF)  
7.2..1 Checking the Delivery Consignment  
The printer can be operated with up to three ASF cassettes. The delivery  
comprises following parts:  
S
S
S
Cassette (1)  
Paper support (2)  
Forms guide (3) (already mounted)  
Two different types of ASF cassettes are available.  
S
S
Type A for regular paper and form sets  
Type B for thick paper types, heavy form sets, and envelopes  
(A sticker with an envelope indicates the ASF cassette B)  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
7.2.2 Prepare the ASF Cassettes  
S
Mount the paper support (2) onto the cassette.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
7.2.3 Installing the ASF Cassettes  
S
Push the tabs (1) of the cassette into the slots (3) of the printer or of another  
ASF cassette until they engage.  
Note:  
S
S
Be careful not to damage the contacts (2) of the cassette while  
installing.  
Up to three ASF cassettes can be installed at any time to enable  
processing of different paper types and formats simultaneously.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
The position of each cassette is dependent on the paper length to be processed.  
The cassette with the shortest paper needs to be mounted first because the  
distance between the pick-up rollers of the cassette and the push rollers inside  
the printer is the shortest at position '1'. For example, if envelopes are to be  
processed cassette type B needs to be cassette '1'.  
Cassette Position  
1 (first mounted)  
2
Minimum Paper Length  
104 mm (4,08 “)  
200 mm (7.87 “)  
3 (last mounted)  
290 mm (11.42 “)  
Note: For detail description see chapter 8 Tecnical Data  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
7.2.4 Removing the ASF Cassette  
Remove the ASF cassette (1) from the printer by drawing back both release  
levers (2).  
Note: To remove all AFS cassettes together release only the ASF cassette in  
position 1. If the ASF cassettes shall be removed individually so start the  
removal procedure with the last mounted ASF cassette.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
7.2.5 lnserting Paper  
The ASF cassette A can be loaded with up to 180 sheets of 80g/m² (21 lb/rearn)  
paper. Cassette B can be loaded with up to 40 envelopes.  
Paper that is intended for use with an ASF cassette must be unpacked and  
acclimatized within the printer environrnent for at least 24 hours prior to loading.  
When loading paper for the first time or changing to another format, the ASF  
cassette needs to be adapted to the paper size used. This can be done with the  
ASF attached to the printer.  
S
S
S
Squeeze the ASF cassettes levers (2) together, until the cassette  
automatically opens its load position.  
lf required pull up and release the locking levers (1) and adjust the paper  
guides (3) to the width of the paper to be loaded.  
Align the left hand edge of the paper with the center marker of the alignment  
scale (4)  
Note: Aligning the edge of the paper with any of the other markers, left or right,  
will move the margin right or left. Each rnarker represents 1/10".  
S
S
Fix paper guides (3) in position by pushing the levers (1) down.  
Manually fan the paper to separate the individual sheets to remove any static  
charge.  
S
Insert the paper between the guides.  
Note: For 80g/m² (21 ib/ream) paper the paper tension lever (5) should be  
positioned to 0.  
S
S
Pull the ASFcassette lever (2) to return it into the operating position.  
Mount the manual sheet feeder (6) or the cut sheet tray (see paragraph 7.4  
Cut Sheet Tray) for the paper output.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
S
Select paper source BIN 1, 2, or 3 (see paragraph 3.5.3 Paper Source).  
Note: Change the pressure off the pick-up rolls by loosen lever (2) if paper in  
use is higher or less than 80 g/m².  
Move tension lever (5) towards - for lighter and + or ++ for heavier paper.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
7.3  
Replacement of the ASF Pick-up Rollers  
The ASF pick-up rollers (1) have an expected life time of approximately  
200,000 pages.  
7.3.1 To Remove the ASF Pick-up Rollers (1)  
S
S
S
S
Remove the ASF cassette (see 7.2.4 Removing the ASF Cassette).  
Remove the small access cover (2) by squeezing it as shown.  
Pull back the retainers (3) as shown and lift the shaft (4) (step 1).  
Pull the shaft (4) out of the cassette (step 2) and slide the pick-up rollers (1)  
off the shaft (4).  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
7.3.2 To Install the Pick-up Rollers  
S
S
Slide the new pick-up rollers (1) onto the shaft (4).  
Insert the free end of the shaft (4) into the mounting (6), ensuring that each  
roller flange (5) is positioned so that they join with the indicated slots.  
S
Carefully snap the shaft (4) into its mounting (3) and fit the small access  
cover (2).  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options  
7.4  
Cut Sheet Tray  
Use the cut sheet tray (1) to collect a batch of paper sheets or formsets in the  
output area.  
7.4.1 Installing the Cut Sheet Tray  
S
S
S
S
Remove the manual sheet feeder (6).  
Remove the upper tractor cassette.  
Insert the cut sheet tray (1) in position of the upper tractor cassette.  
Lift the lower part (2) of the cut sheet tray and align it to length of the paper  
in use.  
S
To get a correct collection of the sheets or forms loosen screw (3) and swivel  
the part (4) down for heavy paper (> 80 g/m²) or up for light  
paper (< 80 g/m²).  
Note: Make a test print and repeat the procedure if necessary.  
S
Mount the ASF cassettes (see paragraph 7.2.3 Installing the ASF  
Cassettes).  
3
2
1
4
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Technical Data  
The standard printer with IBM Proprinter and Epson LQ-2550 emulation is equip-  
ped with the PM SER/PAR (Personality Module). It contains a parallel  
(Centronics®-compatible) and a serial V.24 (RS-232 C) interface.  
The following technical data refer to the standard Personality Module PM SER/  
PAR.  
8.1  
Printer Specification  
Print head technology  
Serial Impact Dot Matrix (SIDM) technology.  
Print direction  
Bidirectional with logic seeking.  
Print head  
24 needles, needle diameter 0.25 mm (0.01 inch)  
Print matrix  
S
S
S
S
24 x 36 for letter quality (LQ)  
12 x 36 for near letter quality (NLQ)  
12 x 12 for draft (DRAFT)  
12 x 10 for high speed draft (HS)  
Print format  
up to165 characters at 10 cpi  
Ribbon  
Black nylon ribbon for 30 million characters, auto ribbon run control.  
Dimensions  
S
S
S
Width = 734 mm  
Depth = 280 mm  
Height= 295 mm  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Data  
Weight  
Approximately 20 kg  
Diagnostics  
Selftest, 'Hex dump', remote diagnostics via interface.  
Operator Panel  
16 digit LCD for menu controlled setup, status- and error messages, trilingual  
(German, English, French).  
Rated Voltage  
100 - 240 V~ at rated f = 50 - 60 Hz  
Power input  
< 200 W operating, < 30 W standby  
Environmental Temperature  
Operating:  
Storage:  
+10 °C to + 35 °C (+ 50 °F to + 95 °F)  
- 40 °C to + 70 °C (- 40 °F to + 158 °F)  
Relative Humidity  
operating: 20% - 80%  
30% - 70% (when printing on cut sheets)  
5% - 85%  
storage:  
Noise level  
<53 dB(A) (operating) acc. to ISO 7779  
Agency Approvals  
Acc. to VDE / GS, UL, CE, FCC-B  
Eml Approvalss  
Acc. to regulation of FTZ/FCC, class B  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Data  
8.2  
Performance  
Print speed (at 10 cpi)  
S
S
S
S
S
HSD  
(High Speed Draft)  
720 cps,  
DRAFT (Draft Quality)  
600 cps,  
NLQ  
LQ 1  
LQ 2  
(Near Letter Quality)  
300 cps,  
(Letter Quality)  
(Letter Quality)  
150 cps 1) ,  
100 cps 1) .  
1) depending on the selected font  
Throughput acc. to ECMA-132  
Standard Letter (Dr. Grauert)  
S
S
Draft Quality:  
Letter Quality:  
580 pages/h  
260 pages/h  
Workload  
30.000 pages per month  
MTBF  
10,000 h at 30% duty cycle  
8.3  
Paper Handling  
Integrated push tractor with park position for continuous paper, zero tear off,  
manual front insertion.  
Paper width max 16.6". Automatic Paper(form set)- and envelope feeder with up  
to three selectable cassettes for max. A4 / Letter format.  
Paper path  
Flat bed technology.  
S
transportable form thickness max 2.0 mm  
Automatic Gap Control (AGC)  
The Automatic Gap Control (AGC) optimizes automatically the print gap  
according to paper thickness.  
Copies  
S
S
1 original + 6 copies (max. form thickness 0.5 mm [0.02 inch] ).  
1 original without any copy by a form thickness of max. 1.0 mm  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Data  
8.3.1 Tractor Feed  
Continuous forms (1 original plus 6 copies) suitable for tractor feed:  
S
S
Feeding:  
Output:  
2 removable tractor cassettes  
rear side  
minimum  
maximum  
420 mm (17.7")  
14"  
S
S
S
Paper width:  
Paper length:  
Paper weight:  
100 mm (4")  
63 mm (2,5")  
S
S
S
S
1-ply  
60 g/m²  
120 g/m²  
multiply (per sheet) 40 g/m²  
total set  
350 g/m²  
total paper / form thickness  
0.5 mm (0.02")  
21 inch/sec  
S
Paper movement:  
8.3.2 ManuaI Insertion  
Print media suitable for manual insertion:  
minimum  
maximum  
420 mm  
315 mm  
S
S
S
Paper width:  
Paper length:  
Paper weight:  
100 mm  
63 mm  
S
S
Cut sheets  
70 g/m²  
260 g/m²  
Form set of action paper  
S
first sheet  
other sheets  
last sheet  
total set  
70 g/m²  
S
S
S
40 g/m²  
70 g/m²  
350 g/m²  
S
Total paper/form thickness  
S
S
printing  
0.5 mm (0.02")  
2.0 mm  
transport  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Data  
8.4  
Connectivity  
Interface  
S
S
Parallel Centronics® (IEEE 1284 compatibility mode and nibble mode)  
Serial RS-232/RS-422 shared operation  
Emulations  
S
S
EPSON® LQ 1060/2550 / ESC/P2  
IBM® Proprinter XL24 (AGM)  
Buffer  
S
Up to 64 kByte.  
Character Sets (see also Appendix B "Character Set Tables")  
S
Code Pages EE: 437 GK, 851 GK, 928 GK, 855 CYRI, 852, 866, 869,  
Kamenicky, ISO Latin 2, Mazovia, 437 HUN, 852 SEE, 866 LAT, WIN LAT 2.  
Code Pages EE2: 771, 773, 774, 775, Baltic RIM.  
ISO 8859/15  
S
S
S
S
S
S
ISO 8859/1  
IBM SET 1+ 2 incl. 14 national versions.  
IBM Code Pages 437, 850, 858, 860, 863, 865.  
Epson Ext. Graphic Character Set incl. 15 national versions.  
Fonts  
S
S
DRAFT:  
Data, HSP; and Data Large.  
Roman, San Serif, Courier, Prestige, Script,  
Orator-C, and Orator.  
Near letter and letter quality:  
S
Letter quality:  
OCR B, OCR A.  
Character Attributes  
Bold, italic, shadow, outline, double strike, underline, double underline, overline,  
strike through, sub/superscript.  
Size  
double to octuple for all fonts, Data Large 99-fold size.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Data  
Character Pitch  
Standard character pitches are: 10, 12, 15, 17.1, 18, 20 cpi and proportional. In  
addition, commands are defined to select non-standard character pitches. It is  
also possible to print overlapped characters. Fonts will be compressed if smaller  
pitches are selected.  
Line Spacing  
2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12 ... 360 lpi  
Barcodes  
Code 39, 2 of 5 industrial, 2 of 5 interleaved, Codabar (Monarch), EAN 8, EAN  
13, Code 93, MSI Mod 10/10, UPC-E, UPC-A, Code 128 (incl. EAN 128),  
Postnet and KIX Code (see also Appendix G Barcode Quick Reference).  
Graphics  
Max. resolution (V x H). 180 x 360 dpi: Single pass  
360 x 360 dpi: Double pass.  
Graphics Quality  
Selectable are: Standard, Win.LQ 180 dpi, Win.NLQ 90 dpi, or Win.Draft 60 dpi  
Note: Printer drivers for Windows 3.x, 95, 98, NT 4.0 are available. (See  
CD-ROM).  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Data  
8.5  
Options  
8.5.1 Printer Stand  
Provides the optimum work station convenience.  
S
S
S
S
Width:  
635 mm  
660 mm  
840 mm  
20 kg  
Depth:  
Height:  
Weight: approx.  
8.5.2 Automatic Sheet Feeder  
Suitable for automatic insertion of cut sheets and thin form sets (Cassette A) or  
for thick and inflexible sheets, not interrupted top-glued forms, and envelopes  
(Cassette B).  
Automatic Sheet Feeder Cassette A  
minimum  
maximum  
S
S
Paper width:  
105 mm (4.13")  
105 mm (4.13")  
305 mm (12")  
315 mm (12.4")  
Paper length:  
The minimum paper length for all cassettes depends on the mounting position of  
the cassette as the feeding path of the paper is the longest in the last mounted  
cassette.  
Paper Length  
minimum  
maximum  
Cassette 1 (first mounted)  
Cassette 2  
104 mm (4.09")  
200 mm (7.87")  
290 mm (11.42")  
315 mm (12.4")  
315 mm (12.4")  
315 mm (12.4")  
Cassette 3 (last mounted)  
Paper weight  
S
Cut sheets  
70 g/m² (18 lb/ream)  
100 g/m² (26 lb/ream)  
260 g/m² (69 lb/ream)  
-
Form sets of action paper  
S
S
Weight of the first and last sheet  
70 g/m² (18 lb/ream)  
80 g/m² (20 lb/ream)  
0.35 mm (0.014")  
Total thickness of set  
Note: The first and last page of the form set must have a weight between 70  
and 80 g/m²; the top-glued area must end 20 mm from the left and right  
margins.  
Capacity:  
180 sheets of 80 g/m² (21 lb/ream) paper weight.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Data  
8.5.3 Automatic Sheet Feeder with Cassette B  
minimum  
maximum  
Paper width:  
105 mm (4.13")  
305 mm (12")  
The minimum paper length for cassette B depends on the mounting position of  
the cassette as the feeding path of the paper is the longest in the last mounted  
cassette.  
Paper Length  
minimum  
maximum  
Cassette 1 (first mounted)  
Cassette 2  
104 mm (4.09")  
200 mm (7.87")  
290 mm (11.42")  
315 mm (12.4")  
315 mm (12.4")  
315 mm (12.4")  
Cassette 3 (last mounted)  
Paper weight  
S
Cut sheets  
100g/m² (26 lb/ream) 150g/m² (40 lb/ream)  
Appropriate direction of the fibre and flexibility for automatic feeding required.  
S
Form sets of action paper  
300g/m² (80 lb/ream)  
70 / 80g/m²  
S
Weight of first / last page  
(18/21 lb/ream)  
0.5mm (0.02")  
S
Total thickness of set  
Note: The form sets for cassette B must not have a horizontal perforation or  
carbon paper; the top-glued area must not have any margins as required  
for cassette A.  
S
Envelopes unlined,  
70g/m² (18 lb/ream)  
90g/m² (24 lb/ream)  
40 envelopes  
adhesive flap covered  
S
Capacity:  
of 70g/m² (18 lb/ream) paper weight  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
There are two system interfaces:  
S one serial interface with RS-232C or RS-422 support  
S one Parallel Centronics interface.  
The interfaces can be operated in three different modes:  
S parallel interface active  
S parallel interface active in shared mode with serial RS-232C  
S parallel interface active in shared mode with serial RS-422  
The following chapter gives an overview about interface characteristics, control  
signals, protocols, and cabling.  
Any change to the operation mode (PARALLEL, PARALL. / RS232, or  
PARALL. / RS422) and to the size of the interface buffer is only possible when  
the interface buffer is completely empty of data.  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
1.  
Serial Interface RS-232C / RS-422  
1.1 Interface Characteristics  
Signal Description RS-232C  
Protective Ground  
Pin No. Direction  
PG  
1
2
3
4
5
6
-
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
Transmit Data (from printer to host)  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
Receive Data (from host to printer)  
Request to Send (printer is requesting data transfer from host)  
Clear to Send (host is ready to receive data from printer)  
Data Set Ready (host is requesting data transfer from printer,  
can not be used for flow control, internaly set to "1")  
SG  
Signal Ground  
7
-
DTR  
Data Terminal Ready (printer is ready to receive - see also on the  
following pages the data communication protocols for detail meaning  
20  
OUTPUT  
Signal Description RS-422  
Protective Ground  
Pin No. Direction  
PG  
1
3
-
RDA  
SDA  
SDB  
RDB  
Receive Data (from host to printer)  
Send Data (from printer to host)  
Not Send Data (from printer to host)  
Not Receive Data (from host to printer)  
INPUT  
9
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
10  
18  
S Transmission rate: 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 baud  
S Parity:  
even, odd, or none  
7, or 8 bits  
S Word length:  
S Number of stop bits: In receive mode the printer accepts 1, or 2 stop bits. The  
printer transmits always two bits.  
Transmission Protocols:  
S DTR - Ready/Busy (only RS-232C)  
S XON/XOFF  
S XON/XOFF + DTR (only RS-232C)  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
1.2 Transmission Protocols and Connection Diagrams  
1.2.1 DTR - Ready/Busy  
(Supported RS-232C Protocols) - Full Duplex Local Connection  
This protocol uses the following signal lines:  
S Pin  
1 Protective Ground (PG)  
2 Transmit Data (TXD)  
3 Receive Data (RXD)  
5 Clear to Send (CTS)  
7 Signal Ground (SG)  
S
S
S
S
S
20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)  
Note: The signal lines TXD (pin 2) and CTS (pin 5) are only necessary if the  
Device Status Report is required.  
The READY / BUSY DTR protocol uses the DATA TERMINAL READY  
(DTR) line to control the transmission of data from the host to prevent a  
buffer overflow.  
Note: Printer DTR may be connected to host DSR + CTS or only to host DSR  
and a bridge between RTS and CTS.  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
Note: Printer DTR may be connected to host DSR + CTS or only to host DSR  
and a bridge between RTS and CTS.  
Additional Information  
After Power-ON DTR is activated and the printer is ready to receive data.  
DTR is deactivated when the interface buffer has only space left for 256 more  
characters. Further incoming data will be stored until the interface buffer is full.  
All data sent in addition will get lost. DTR is activated again if there is a free  
interface buffer space of 512 characters.  
DTR is immediately deactivated, if local mode is entered.  
It is activated again, if local mode is left and a minimum of 512 bytes interface  
buffer is available.  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
1.2.2 XON / XOFF  
This protocol requires all signal lines.  
S Pin  
1 Protective Ground (PG)  
2 Transmit Data (TXD)  
3 Receive Data (RXD)  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
4 Request to Send (RTS)  
5 Clear to Send (CTS)  
6 Data Set Ready (DSR)  
7 Signal Ground (SG)  
20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)  
Standard Connection  
25 pin  
25 pin  
For local connections RTS with CTS can be connected and likewise DTR with  
DSR.  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
Additional Information to XON / XOFF  
After Power-ON DTR and RTS are activated and the printer is ready to receive  
data.  
XOFF is sent, when the interface buffer has only space left for 256 more charac-  
ters. XOFF is sent again, at a level of 128 characters buffer space. Further  
incoming data will be stored until the interface buffer is full. All data sent in  
addition will get lost.  
XON is sent when the interface buffer provides space for a minimum of 512  
characters.  
XON/XOFF can only be sent successfully when CTS is at active state.  
When the CTS Mode is set to "CTS ignore" CTS is allways in the active state.  
XOFF will be sent immediately if local mode is entered.  
XON is sent again, if local mode is left and a minimum of 512 byte interface  
buffer is available.  
A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
1.2.3 Serial Interface with RS-422  
This interface typ requires the signal lines.  
S Pin  
1 Protective Ground (PG)  
3 Receive Data (RDA)  
9 Send Data (SDA)  
S
S
S
S
10 Not Send Data (SDB)  
18 Not Receive Data (RDB)  
Standard Connection  
RS-422  
PG  
RS-422  
1
PG  
RDA  
SDA  
3
9
RDA  
SDA  
SDB  
RDB  
SDB  
RDB  
10  
18  
Note: Protective ground (PG) connected either to host or printer  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
2.  
Parallel Centronics® Interface  
2.1  
Interface Characteristics - Connector Pin Assignment / Signal  
Definition  
Pin No. Return line Direction  
Pin No.  
Signal Description  
_______  
STROBE  
Control Signal from the Host. Printer reads data line  
(Data 1 to Data 8) when going low.  
1
19  
Input  
*)  
*)  
Data 1 - 8  
Data lines transfer the characters from the host to  
the printer. Data 8 = most significant bit.  
2 - 9  
20 - 27  
28  
Input  
_____  
ACKN  
Acknowledge - Negative going pulse from the printer 10  
indicates that the printer has received a character  
and is ready for the next data transfer.  
Output  
BUSY  
PE  
Control signal from the printer. A high level indicates 11  
that the printer is unable to receive any more data.**)  
29  
--  
Output  
Output  
Paper Empty - Control signal from the printer. This  
signal goes high when paper runs out, i.e. load  
upper or lower tractor, paper jam.  
12  
SELECT  
Control signal from the printer. A high level indicates 13  
--  
Output  
that the printer is ON-LINE and ready.  
LG  
--  
Logic Ground  
not used  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
LG  
CG  
VCC  
SG  
Logic Ground  
Chassis Ground  
+ 5 volt  
Signal Ground  
19 - 20 --  
____  
INIT  
Control signal from the host. Does not reset the prin- 31  
ter.  
--  
Input  
*)  
*)  
______  
FAULT  
Control signal from the printer. A low level indicates  
that the printer has been switched off, or the serial  
interface is active.  
32  
--  
Output  
LG  
--  
Logic Ground  
not used  
33  
--  
34 - 35 --  
_________ Compatible mode (low) 1284 nibble mode (high)  
SELECT IN  
36 30  
Input  
*)  
Overlined signal names indicate that the signal is true when the signal level is  
low.  
**)  
When the interface buffer is full except for the last character, BUSY will not be  
reset. BUSY will be reset when buffer space is available again for least 512  
characters in the interface buffer. While the printer is offline (Stop Mode), or  
BUSY remains active until the printer enters the online state again.  
IEEE Std 1284 Nibble mode including Device ID are supported.  
The maximum throughput for data transfer is 42,000 characters per second.  
A-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
2.2  
Transmission Protocol Description  
After Power-ON the PE (Paper Empty) signal is set to low level and the SELECT  
and F¯A¯U¯L¯T¯signals are set to high level.  
The printer is now ON-LINE and ready to receive data.  
Timing  
The host sets a print/control character to the 8 data lines.  
After a time delay of a minimum of 0.5 µs, the host sends a S¯T¯R¯O¯B¯E¯ pulse of a  
minimum of 0.5 µs. When the data byte is accepted into the interface buffer the  
printer transmits a BUSY signal and an ¯A¯C¯K¯N pulse.  
The ¯A¯C¯K¯N pulse informs the host that the data has been received and that the  
printer is ready to receive new data.  
If the interface buffer is full except for the last character the BUSY is not reset in  
order to stop the data transfer from the host. The BUSY signal is only reset if  
space is available in the interface buffer for a minimum of 512 characters.  
While the printer is offline, or a serial interface is active BUSY remains high and  
no ¯A¯C¯K¯N is sent until the printer enters online state or the serial interface is  
deselected.  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
2.3  
Timing Diagram  
DATA 1 - 8  
DATA  
0.5 Fs  
¯¯¯¯¯¯¯¯  
STROBE  
0.5 Fs  
350 ns max  
BUSY  
¯¯¯¯¯  
ACKN  
0.5 Fs  
A-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A System Interface Description  
3.  
Shared Operation  
In shared operation the interface buffer capacity is reduced by 256 bytes.  
After Power-ON both the serial and the parallel interfaces are available for data  
transfer.  
If a byte is first recognized by the serial interface the parallel interface is imme-  
diately disabled by the BUSY signal. The serial interface is now active and will  
operate, using the installed protocols.  
If a byte is first recognized by the parallel interface either the DTR signal of the  
serial interface is set to OFF or XOFF is sent, depending on the protocol.  
If the serial interface starts to receive data while the parallel interface is active, it  
is possible to receive 256 bytes of serial data. Any additional serial data will be  
lost.  
When the interface buffer is completely empty of serial data, and no new data  
has been received by the serial interface for more than 10 seconds, both  
interfaces are available for data transfer again.  
When the interface buffer is completely empty of parallel data and no data has  
been received by the parallel interface for more than 60 seconds, the 256 bytes  
of serial data will be processed. Afterwards, both interfaces are available for  
data transfer again.  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
The Printer with the Personality Module (PM SER/PAR) provides the following  
resident fonts:  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
Character Pitches  
B-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
B-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
B-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
B-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B Print Samples of Resident Fonts  
B-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
1.1  
Code Table ISO 8859-1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
E
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
"
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
|
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
³
'
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
F
!
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
¸
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
)
©
a
*
¹
*
J
j
o
+
¼
½
¾
¿
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
¬
®
G
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
.
^
~
Î
î
þ
ÿ
/
_
Ï
ï
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
1.2  
Code Table ISO 8859-15  
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
E
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
"
¡
¢
£
¥
Š
§
š
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
³
ð
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
F
!
Ö
×
G
H
I
g
h
i
ñ
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
)
©
a
*
¹
*
J
j
o
+
Œ
œ
Ÿ
¿
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
¬
®
G
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
.
^
~
Î
î
þ
ÿ
/
_
Ï
ï
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
2
Code Table IBM All Character Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
i
<
=
;
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
!
.
J
"
/
(
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
$
'
±
$
#
!
)
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
*
1
I
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
B
E
F
µ
J
Ë
Ê
Í
§
_
0
8
9
6
7
2
:
ö
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
"
÷
.
û
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
!
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
3
"
ÿ
¿
1
M
1
S
*
4
ø
,
E
)
Ö
Ü
¢
@
4
%
&
*
+
'
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¡
+
$
·
%
6
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
4
>
N
%
'
²
>
?
.
^
~
Ä
Å
.
*
#
/
_
ƒ
+
&
1
SP  
Applicable for Code Table IBM Set 1 and 2  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
3
Code Table IBM Set 1  
National Version = USA  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL  
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
NUL  
á
í
!
.
J
"
/
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
$
'
±
$
#
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
*
1
I
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
B
E
F
µ
J
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
"
÷
.
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
BEL  
G
H
I
g
h
i
BEL  
º
BS CAN  
HT  
BS CAN  
HT  
¿
1
M
1
S
*
4
ø
,
E
)
@
LF  
*
J
j
LF  
¬
½
¼
¡
+
$
·
%
6
VT ESC  
FF  
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
VT ESC  
FF  
<
=
>
?
\
|
:
(
CR  
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
CR  
4
>
N
%
'
²
SO  
.
^
~
SO  
*
#
SI  
/
_
SI  
+
&
1
SP  
C-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
3.1 National Version IBM Set 1  
Character Code (Hex)  
23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E  
1: USA  
#
#
#
£
#
#
#
$
$
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
§
@
à
[
E
Ä
[
\
]
^
^
`
`
{
é
ä
{
|
}
~
¨
2: FRANCE  
3: GERMANY  
4: U.K.  
ç
§
Ü
]
ù
ö
|
è
ü
}
§
Ö
\
^
`
ß
~
~
ü
ì
@
@
É
^
`
5: DENMARK  
6: SWEDEN  
7: ITALY  
Æ
Ä
E
¡
Ø
Ö
\
Å
Å
é
¿
]
^
`
æ
ä
à
¨
ø
ö
ò
ñ
|
å
å
è
}
Ü
^
é
ù
`
@
@
@
É
8: SPAIN  
.
Ñ
¥
^
~
~
ü
ü
ú
ú
ü
9: JAPAN  
#
#
#
#
#
#
[
^
`
{
}
10: NORWAY  
11: DENMARK 2  
12: SPAIN 2  
13: LATIN AM.  
14: TURKEY  
Æ
Æ
¡
Ø
Ø
Ñ
Ñ
Ö
Å
Å
¿
¿
Ô
Ü
Ü
é
é
Ü
é
é
`
æ
æ
í
ø
ø
ñ
ñ
ö
å
å
ó
ó
Õ
É
á
á
¡
Ü
í
¦
Ç
ç
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
4
Code Table IBM Set 2  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL  
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
!
.
J
a
ß
G
p
S
s
/
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
§
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
±
$
#
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
*
1
I
Ì
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
Ë
Ê
Í
ö
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
"
÷
.
û
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
µ
t
BEL  
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
BS CAN  
HT  
ÿ
¿
1
F
T
O
d
4
E
)
Ö
Ü
¢
@
LF  
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¡
+
$
·
%
6
VT ESC  
FF  
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
:
(
CR  
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
4
>
N
%
'
ø
e
1
²
SO  
.
^
~
Ä
Å
.
*
#
SI  
/
_
ƒ
+
&
SP  
C-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
4.1 National Version IBM Set 2  
Character Code (Hex)  
23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E 9B 9D  
1: USA  
#
#
#
£
#
#
#
$
$
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
§
@
à
[
E
Ä
[
\
ç
Ö
\
]
§
Ü
]
^
^
`
`
{
é
ä
{
|
ù
ö
|
}
è
ü
}
~
¨
¢
¢
¢
¢
ø
¢
¢
¢
¢
ø
ø
¢
¢
¢
¥
¥
¥
¥
Ø
¥
¥
¥
¥
Ø
Ø
¥
¥
¥
2: FRANCE  
3: GERMANY  
4: U.K.  
§
^
`
ß
~
~
ü
ì
@
@
É
^
`
5: DENMARK  
6: SWEDEN  
7: ITALY  
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
Ä
E
¡
Ö
\
Å
é
¿
]
Ü
^
é
ù
`
ä
à
¨
ö
ò
ñ
|
å
è
}
@
@
@
@
@
á
8: SPAIN  
.
Ñ
¥
\
^
~
~
~
~
ú
ú
ü
9: JAPAN  
#
#
#
#
#
#
[
^
`
{
}
10: NORWAY  
11: DEMARK 2  
12: SPAIN 2  
13: LATIN AM.  
14: TURKEY  
[
]
^
`
{
|
}
[
\
]
^
`
{
|
}
¡
Ñ
Ñ
Ö
¿
¿
Ô
é
é
Ü
`
í
ñ
ñ
ö
ó
ó
Õ
á
¡
Ü
í
¦
Ç
ç
C-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
5
Code Table IBM Code Page  
Code Page  
Countries  
USA  
1: Code Page 437  
2: Code Page 850  
Germany, U.K., Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain,  
Japan, Latin Am., Turkey  
3: Code Page 858  
Germany, U.K., Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain,  
Japan, Latin Am., Turkey  
inc. EURO Symbol ( € )  
4: Code Page 860  
5: Code Page 863  
6: Code Page 865  
Portugal  
France  
Norway  
C-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
5.1 IBM Code Page 437  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
i
<
=
;
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
!
.
J
a
ß
G
p
S
s
/
(
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
±
$
#
!
)
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
*
1
I
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
Ë
Ê
Í
§
_
0
8
9
6
7
2
:
ö
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
"
÷
.
û
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
µ
t
!
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
3
"
ÿ
¿
1
F
T
O
d
4
E
)
Ö
Ü
¢
@
4
%
&
*
+
'
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¡
+
$
·
%
6
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
4
>
N
%
'
ø
e
1
²
>
?
.
^
~
Ä
Å
.
*
#
/
_
ƒ
+
&
SP  
C-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
5.2 IBM Code Page 850  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
i
<
=
;
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
!
.
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
§
¦
Ó
ß
Ô
Ò
õ
-
±
=
¾
§
÷
¸
(
"
2
0
/
)
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
*
Ë
Ê
Í
§
_
0
8
9
6
7
2
:
ö
1
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
<
5
3
ã
Ã
9
6
=
;
Õ
µ
û
!
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
Î
þ
3
"
ÿ
¿
®
¬
½
¼
¡
Ï
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
?
¨
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
-
4
%
&
*
+
'
*
J
j
+
$
(
<
¹
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
7
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
8
:
³
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
×
¢
¥
,
4
>
¤
|
Ý
¯
²
>
?
.
^
~
Ä
Å
*
ì
#
SP  
/
_
ƒ
+
&
'
C-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
5.3 IBM Code Page 858  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
i
<
=
;
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
!
.
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
¦
Ó
$
-
±
=
¾
§
÷
¸
(
"
2
0
/
)
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
Ô
Ò
õ
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
*
Ë
Ê
Í
§
_
0
8
9
6
7
2
:
ö
1
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
<
5
3
ã
Ã
9
6
=
;
Õ
µ
þ
û
!
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
Î
3
"
ÿ
¿
®
¬
½
¼
¡
Ï
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
4
¨
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
-
4
%
&
*
+
'
*
J
j
+
$
(
<
¹
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
7
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
8
:
³
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
×
¢
¥
,
4
>
¤
|
Ý
¯
²
>
?
.
^
~
Ä
Å
*
ì
#
SP  
/
_
ƒ
+
&
'
C-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
5.4 IBM Code Page 860  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
i
<
=
;
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ã
à
Á
ç
ê
Ê
è
ï
É
À
È
ô
õ
ò
Ú
ù
Ì
á
í
!
.
J
"
/
(
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
$
'
±
$
#
!
)
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
*
1
I
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
B
E
F
µ
J
Ë
Ê
Í
§
_
0
8
9
6
7
2
:
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
"
÷
.
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
!
G
H
I
g
h
i
º
3
"
¿
Ò
¬
½
¼
¡
M
1
S
*
4
ø
,
E
)
Õ
Ü
¢
£
Ù
.
@
4
%
&
*
+
'
*
J
j
+
$
·
%
6
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
4
>
N
%
'
²
>
?
.
^
~
Ã
Å
*
#
/
_
Ó
+
&
1
SP  
C-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
5.5 IBM Code Page 863  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
i
<
=
;
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
Â
à
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
È
Ê
ô
|
'
!
.
J
"
/
(
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
$
'
±
$
#
!
)
"
ó
ú
¨
#
*
1
I
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
B
E
F
µ
J
Ë
Ê
Í
§
_
0
8
9
6
7
2
:
Ë
Ï
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
¸
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
"
÷
.
û
³
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
!
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
¯
Î
3
"
¤
M
1
S
*
4
ø
,
E
)
Ô
Ü
¢
1
¬
½
¼
¾
*
+
@
4
%
&
*
+
'
*
J
j
+
$
·
%
6
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
=
À
§
Ù
Û
ƒ
4
>
N
%
'
²
>
?
.
^
~
#
/
_
&
1
SP  
C-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
5.6 IBM Code Page 865  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
i
<
=
;
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
!
.
J
"
/
(
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
$
'
±
$
#
!
)
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
*
1
I
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
B
E
F
µ
J
Ë
Ê
Í
§
_
0
8
9
6
7
2
:
ö
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
"
÷
.
û
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
!
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
3
"
ÿ
¿
1
M
1
S
*
4
ø
,
E
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
@
4
%
&
*
+
'
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¡
+
$
·
%
6
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
.
4
>
N
%
'
²
>
?
.
^
~
Ä
Å
*
#
/
_
ƒ
¤
&
1
SP  
C-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
6
EPSON Extended Graphics Character Table  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
!
.
J
"
/
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
$
'
±
$
#
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
*
1
I
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
B
E
F
µ
J
ö
)
§
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
"
÷
.
û
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
ÿ
¿
1
M
1
S
*
4
ø
,
E
)
Ö
Ü
¢
@
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¡
+
$
·
%
6
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
4
>
N
%
'
²
.
^
~
Ä
Å
.
*
#
/
_
ƒ
+
&
1
SP  
C-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
6.1 National Version EPSON Extended graphics Character Table  
Character Code (Hex)  
23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D  
7E  
1: USA  
#
#
#
£
#
#
#
$
$
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
§
@
à
[
E
Ä
[
\
]
^
^
`
`
{
é
ä
{
|
ù
ö
|
}
~
¨
2: FRANCE  
3: GERMANY  
4: U.K.  
ç
§
Ü
]
è
ü
}
§
Ö
\
^
`
ß
~
~
ü
ì
@
@
É
^
`
5: DENMARK  
6: SWEDEN  
7: ITALY  
Æ
Ä
E
¡
Ø
Ö
\
Å
Å
é
¿
]
^
`
æ
ä
à
¨
ø
ö
ò
ñ
|
å
å
è
}
Ü
^
é
ù
`
@
@
@
É
8: SPAIN  
.
Ñ
¥
Ø
Ø
Ñ
Ñ
Ö
'
^
~
~
ü
ü
ú
ú
ü
9: JAPAN  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
[
^
`
{
}
10: NORWAY  
11: DENMARK 2  
12: SPAIN 2  
13: LATIN AM.  
14: TURKEY  
15: LEGAL  
Æ
Æ
¡
Å
Å
¿
¿
Ô
"
Ü
Ü
é
é
Ü
é
é
`
æ
æ
í
ø
ø
ñ
ñ
ö
®
å
å
ó
ó
Õ
É
á
á
¡
Ü
`
í
¦
Ç
E
ç
$
§
©
C-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
6.2 EPSON Italic Character Table  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
"
"
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
G
H
I
g
h
i
)
)
*
J
j
*
J
j
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
<
=
>
?
\
|
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
.
^
~
.
^
~
/
_
/
_
This character table is selected by the command ESC t.  
C-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
6.3 National Version EPSON Italic Character Table (part 1)  
Character Code (Hex)  
23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D  
7E  
1: USA  
#
#
#
£
#
#
#
$
$
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
§
@
à
[
E
Ä
[
\
]
^
^
`
`
{
é
ä
{
|
ù
ö
|
}
~
¨
2: FRANCE  
3: GERMANY  
4: U.K.  
ç
§
Ü
]
è
ü
}
§
Ö
\
^
`
ß
~
~
ü
ì
@
@
É
^
`
5: DENMARK  
6: SWEDEN  
7: ITALY  
Æ
Ä
E
¡
Ø
Ö
\
Å
Å
é
¿
]
^
`
æ
ä
à
¨
ø
ö
ò
ñ
|
å
å
è
}
Ü
^
é
ù
`
@
@
@
É
8: SPAIN  
.
Ñ
¥
Ø
Ø
Ñ
Ñ
Ö
'
^
~
~
ü
ü
ú
ú
ü
9: JAPAN  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
[
^
`
{
}
10: NORWAY  
11: DENMARK 2  
12: SPAIN 2  
13: LATIN AM.  
14: TURKEY  
15: LEGAL  
Æ
Æ
¡
Å
Å
¿
¿
Ô
"
Ü
Ü
é
é
Ü
é
é
`
æ
æ
í
ø
ø
ñ
ñ
ö
®
å
å
ó
ó
Õ
É
á
á
¡
Ü
`
í
¦
Ç
E
ç
$
§
©
C-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
6.3 National Version EPSON Italic Character Table (part 2)  
Character Code (Hex)  
A3  
A4 C0 DB DC DD DE E0 FB FC FD  
FE  
1: USA  
#
#
#
£
#
#
#
.
$
$
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
¤
$
$
$
§
@
à
[
E
Ä
[
\
]
^
^
`
`
{
é
ä
{
|
ù
ö
|
}
~
¨
2: FRANCE  
3: GERMANY  
4: U.K.  
ç
§
Ü
]
è
ü
}
§
Ö
\
^
`
ß
~
~
ü
ì
@
@
É
^
`
5: DENMARK  
6: SWEDEN  
7: ITALY  
Æ
Ä
E
¡
Ø
Ö
\
Å
Å
é
¿
]
^
`
æ
ä
à
¨
ø
ö
ò
ñ
|
å
å
è
}
Ü
^
é
ù
`
@
@
@
É
8: SPAIN  
Ñ
¥
Ø
Ø
Ñ
Ñ
Ö
'
^
~
~
ü
ü
ú
ú
ü
9: JAPAN  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
[
^
`
{
}
10: NORWAY  
11: DENMARK 2  
12: SPAIN 2  
13: LATIN AM.  
14: TURKEY  
15: LEGAL  
Æ
Æ
¡
Å
Å
¿
¿
Ô
"
Ü
Ü
é
é
Ü
é
é
`
æ
æ
í
ø
ø
ñ
ñ
ö
®
å
å
ó
ó
Õ
É
á
á
¡
Ü
`
í
¦
Ç
E
ç
$
§
©
C-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
7
Code Table OCR-A  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL  
SOH  
STX  
ETX  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
HT  
LF  
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
p
q
r
a
b
c
d
e
f
"
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
)
*
J
j
VT  
FF  
+
¬
-
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR  
SO  
SI  
GR  
RS  
US  
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
.
^
/
$
C-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.  
Code Pages for the Eastern European Countries (EE)  
8.1 CODEPAGE 437 Greek  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
?
?
G
?
?
?
?
T
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
S
?
?
F
?
?
O
a
ß
?
d
e
?
?
?
?
?
?
µ
?
?
?
p
?
s
?
t
!
.
J
?
O,  
±
$
#
!
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
"
#
*
1
I
¦
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
?
?
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
Æ
"
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
Ï
÷
.
G
H
I
g
h
i
Û
?
é
E
£
¥
%
6
²
)
*
J
j
+
$
?,  
?,  
?,  
?,  
?,  
?,  
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
?
n
?
?
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
4
>
N
%
'
.
^
~
#
/
_
&
SP = Space  
C-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.2 CODEPAGE 851 Greek  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
?
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
Á
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
?
?
Ï
!
"
.
?
?
F
?
?
O
a
ß
?
-
?
?
?
?
?
?
µ
?
?
?
p
?
s
?
t
-
±
?
n
?
§
?
¸
2
0
/
"
?,  
ô
ö
?,  
û
ù
O,  
Ö
Ü
#
*
1
?
?
?
?
<
5
7
8
?
?
,
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
Û
?
?
G
?
?
?
?
½
T
?
*
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
3
?
?
9
6
=
;
G
H
I
g
h
i
°
)
¨
*
J
j
+
$
?
Ü
Ý
?
#
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
¦
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
?,  
Ä
?,  
4
>
G
?
g
.
^
~
?
\
/
_
+
&
r
SP = Space  
C-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.3 CODEPAGE 928 Greek  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
É
æ
Æ
ô
°
±
²
?
?
?
?
Ú
a
ß
?
d
e
?
p
?
<
"
?
?
#
$
%
&
s
t
£
³
G
?
S
?
s
t
ö
t
ˆ
U
V
u
v
ò
?
?
?
n
R
T
û
,?  
?
F
7
8
*
(
7
8
9
:
G
H
I
W
X
Y
Z
[
g
h
i
w
x
y
z
{
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
ù
ÿ
§
¨
!
?
T
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
O
Ï
?
?
?
?
?
µ
?
?
?
?
?
?
,?  
,?  
,?  
+
9
)
Ö
Ü
¢
£
¥
.
©
?
*
A
B
C
D
E
F
*
+
´
J
j
?
;
K
L
k
l
Ÿ
?
Ï
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
¬
,?  
½
,?  
,O  
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¦
Û
é
.
^
~
Ä
Å
?
/
_
ƒ
!
Æ
SP = Space  
C-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.4 CODEPAGE 855 Cyri  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
?
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
*
!
.
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
-
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
m
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
"
2
0
/
"
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
#
*
1
?
?
?
?
<
5
7
8
Å
Ä
,
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
3
?
?
9
6
=
;
G
H
I
g
h
i
)
*
J
j
+
$
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
4
>
¤
?
?
&
.
^
~
#
/
_
+
SP = Space  
C-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.5 CODEPAGE 866  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
!
.
J
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
°
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
"
#
*
1
I
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
3
?
K
9
6
=
;
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
G
H
I
g
h
i
)
!
*
J
j
+
$
!
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
/
<
=
>
?
\
|
:
&
%
'
m
¤
O
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
U
>
N
.
^
~
/
_
(
SP = Space  
C-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.6 CODEPAGE 869  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
?
?
?
?
Ï
!
.
?
?
F
?
?
O
a
ß
?
-
?
?
?
?
?
?
µ
?
?
?
p
!
"
2
0
/
±
?
n
?
§
"
?,  
#
*
1
?
?
?
?
<
5
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
Û
?
?
G
?
?
?
?
)
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
?,  
Ÿ
©
O,  
²
3
?
?
9
6
=
?
?
ˆ
g
h
i
!
°
¨
)
¬
R
T
*
J
j
³
+
?
B
C
D
E
F
+
´
-
.
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
#
r
½
T
?
7
8
?
?
,
;
$
?
s
?
t
?u  
?
é
<
=
>
?
£
¦
:
(
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
?,  
%
?,  
U
>
S
Ç
e
&
^
_
~
?
?
*
O
/
+
t
SP = Space  
C-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.7 CODEPAGE 852  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
u
c
É
L
L
ô
ö
L
l
á
í
!
.
ð
Ð
D
Ë
d
N
í
Ó
ß
ô
N
n
n
Š
š
-
?
3
?
?
§
÷
,
"
2
0
/
"
ó
ú
A
a
Ž
ž
#
*
1
Á
Â
E
S
<
5
7
8
Z
z
,
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
3
A
a
9
6
=
;
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
S
s
î
l
E
e
¬
z
e
-
R
Ú
r
°
)
ë
O
o
î
Ö
Ü
T
t
¨
*
J
j
+
$
"
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
U
ý
u
R
r
<
=
>
?
\
|
C
s
:
(
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Z
Ä
C
L
×
c
U
>
¤
T
U
O
Ý
t
.
^
~
*
#
/
_
+
´
SP = Space  
C-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.8 KAMENICKY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
ü
é
(
É
ž
á
í
!
.
J
L
H
F
B
?
a
ß
G
J
/
"
2
0
/
±
$
#
!
"
Ž
ô
ó
ú
n
N
U
ô
š
#
*
1
I
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
ä
D
T
c
e
E
L
Í
ö
)
3
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ó
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
s
"
÷
.
u
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
µ
t
G
H
I
g
h
i
Ú
ý
F
T
O
d
?
ø
e
1
°
)
Ö
Ü
Š
L
r
*
J
j
r
+
$!  
(
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
R
¼
§
*
/
<
=
>
?
\
|
l
:
6
²
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
l
Ý
R
U
>
N
%
'
.
^
~
Ä
Á
`
t
/
_
+
&
SP = Space  
C-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.9 ISO LATIN 2  
2
3
0
4
5
6
`
7
p
A
B
°
C
R
D
Ð
E
r
F
ð
0
SP  
@
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
"
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
a
b
c
d
e
f
q
r
A
?
L
¤
L
S
§
¨
a
Á
Â
A
Ä
L
N
N
Ó
Ô
O
Ö
x
á
â
a
ä
l
n
n
ó
ô
o
ö
÷
r
R
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
l
'
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
l
s
?
S
š
s
t
C
Ç
C
É
E
Ë
E
Í
c
ç
c
é
e
ë
e
í
g
h
i
R
U
Ú
U
Ü
Ý
T
)
Š
S
T
Z
-
u
ú
u
ü
ý
*
J
j
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
z
?
ž
z
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
.
^
~
Ž
Z
Î
î
t
!
/
_
D
ß
d
SP = Space  
C-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.10 MAZOVIA  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
a
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
E
e
l
Z
Z
ó
Ó
n
N
z
!
.
J
a
ß
G
p
3
/
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
±
$
#
!
"
#
*
1
I
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
ô
ö
C
û
ù
S
Ö
Ü
zl  
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
s
"
÷
.
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
µ
t
G
H
I
g
h
i
z-  
¿
1
F
T
O
d
4
°
!
)
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
i
+
$
!
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
/
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
L
Y-  
s
:
(
6
²
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
c
Ä
A
U
>
N
%
'
ø
e
1
.
^
~
*
/
_
+
&
ƒ
SP = Space  
C-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.11 CODEPAGE 437 HUN  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
o
á
í
!
.
J
a
ß
G
p
3
/
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
±
$
#
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
*
1
I
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
ö
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ó
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
s
"
÷
.
u
M
D
@
<
5
7
8
E
A
,
C
O
P
-
µ
t
G
H
I
g
h
i
Ú
Ü
Ö
Ü
¢
O
¿
1
F
T
O
d
4
°
!
)
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
i
+
$
!
+
´
;
K
L
k
l
/
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
:
(
6
²
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
l
Y-  
.-  
U
>
N
%
'
ø
e
1
.
^
~
Ä
Á
*
/
_
+
&
ƒ
SP = Space  
C-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.12 CODEPAGE 852 SEE  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
Ž
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
ž
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
u
c
É
L
l
á
í
!
.
ð
Ð
D
Ë
d
N
Í
Ó
ß
Ô
N
n
n
Š
š
-
?
3
?
?
§
÷
,
"
2
0
/
"
ó
ú
A
a
Ž
ž
#
*
1
Á
Â
E
S
<
5
7
8
Z
z
,
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
ô
ö
L
l
)
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
š
ð
c
c
3
A
a
9
6
=
;
g
h
i
ç
S
s
Ö
Ü
T
t
Î
l
E
e
¬
z
e
-
R
Ú
r
°
)
ë
O
o
î
¨
*
J
j
+
$
"
+
´
;
K
L
Š
Ð
C
C
_
k
l
U
ý
u
R
r
<
=
>
?
C
s
:
(
-
M
N
O
m
n
o
Z
Ä
C
L
×
c
U
>
¤
T
U
O
Ý
t
.
*
#
/
+
´
SP = Space  
C-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.13 CODEPAGE 866 LAT  
0
i
1
<
=
;
2
SP  
!
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
7
p
q
r
8
?
?
?
j
9
P
C
T
y
A
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
B
!
C
.
D
Š
L
c
C
B
?
E
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
<
(
a
b
c
d
e
f
"
2
0
/
)
"
#
š
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
*
±
°
Ë
Ê
Í
§
0
8
9
6
7
2
?
E
?
?
?
?
?
?
M
H
O
?
k
1
)
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
X
?
r
}
3
~
K
9
6
=
;
·
M
Ã
@
<
5
g
¦
G
H
I
g
h
i
ž
Ž
Æ
!
3
?
?
?
?
b
?
?
?
§
-
)
4
%
&
*
J
j
+
$
+
,
;
K
L
k
2
m
n
o
7
%
N
š
#
<
=
>
?
\
|
8
:
(
* :  
-
M
N
O
]
}
Ç
A
,
4
>
N
ã
+
>
.
^
~
â
'
?
/
_
&
SP = Space  
C-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
8.14 WIN LAT2  
0
1
2
3
0
4
5
6
`
7
p
8
,
9
A
B
°
C
R
D
Ð
E
r
F
ð
0
i
<
SP  
@
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
(
=
;
!
"
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
B
C
D
E
F
Q
R
S
T
a
b
c
d
e
f
q
r
`
´
?
-
±
Á
Â
A
Ä
L
N
N
Ó
Ô
O
Ö
á
â
a
ä
l
n
n
ó
ô
o
ö
)
?
L
¤
A
R
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
s
t
l
'
Ë
Ê
Í
§
_
U
V
u
v
ÿ
C
µ
R
T
-
C
c
7
8
!
0
8
9
6
7
2
:
*
(
7
8
9
:
G
H
I
W
X
Y
Z
[
g
h
i
w
x
y
z
{
§
¨
?
S
a
s
»
L
?
l
Ç
C
É
E
Ë
E
Í
x
R
U
Ú
U
Ü
Ý
T
ç
c
é
e
ë
e
í
÷
r
3
"
9
)
Š
<
š
©
S
«
¬
-
u
ú
u
ü
ý
t
A
B
C
D
E
F
4
%
&
*
+
'
*
+
,
J
j
;
K
L
k
l
>
<
=
>
?
\
|
S
T
s
?
t
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
>
?
.
^
~
Ž
ž
z
®
Z
Î
î
?
d
/
_
Z
z
D
ß
!
SP = Space  
C-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
9.  
Code Pages for the Eastern European Countries (EE2)  
9.1 CP 771  
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
7
p
q
r
8
?
?
?
j
9
P
C
T
y
A
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
B
!
C
.
D
J
E
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
F
E
e
Ž
0 i <  
( =  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
"
2
0
/
L
H
F
B
?
)
;
#
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
*
Ë
Ê
Í
§
0
8
9
6
7
2
?
E
?
?
?
?
?
?
M
H
O
?
k
1
)
¨
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
X
?
r
I
3
G
K
9
6
=
;
©
M
D
@
<
5
C
O
P
-
Š
š
ä
G
H
I
g
h
i
3
?
?
?
?
b
?
?
?
)
å
4
%
&
*
J
j
+
$
â
+
,
;
K
L
k
2
m
n
o
7
ã
<
=
>
?
\
|
8
:
A
a
C
c
Ž
ž
O
* :  
-
M
N
O
]
}
E
A
,
4
>
N
+ >  
.
^
~
'
?
/
_
C-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
9.2 CP 773  
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
7
p
q
r
8
ˆ
9
É
æ
Æ
Ç
ö
A
}
B
!
C
.
D
°
E
Ó
ß
Ö
N
õ
Õ
µ
n
°
F
E
e
Ž
0 i <  
( =  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
ü
é
~
ä
¦
"
2
0
/
L
?
.
)
;
Ó
Z
z
#
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
*
Ë
Ê
Í
§
0
8
9
6
7
2
1
)
¹
¨
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
š
Z
?
|
±
M
?
3
÷
K
9
6
=
;
©
á
c
l
¢
³
Š
š
ä
G
H
I
g
h
i
Ö
×
3
©
®
¬
½
¼
L
¼
<
5
²
-
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
±
å
4
%
&
*
J
j
Î
+
$
â
+
,
;
K
L
k
2
m
n
o
Ï
7
·
ã
<
=
>
?
\
|
§
Z
Ä
Á
8
:
A
a
C
c
Ã
Ž
ž
O
* :  
-
M
N
O
]
}
Ø
x
§
,
4
>
N
+ >  
.
^
~
*
+
Â
*
'
?
/
_
¤
C-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
9.3 CP 774  
0
i
1
<
=
;
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
7
p
q
r
8
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
9
É
æ
Æ
ô
A
á
í
B
!
C
.
D
a
c
E
a
ß
G
?
G
s
F
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
"
2
0
/
±
$
#
)
ó
ú
û
#
*
1
À
ˆ
e
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
Ë
Ê
Í
§
0
8
9
6
7
2
ö
)
©
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
ú
3
ä
â
9
6
=
;
š
å
u
ž
-
û
ª
µ
t
0
.
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
E
Ž
<
5
7
8
¨
3
ÿ
¿
1
F
T
O
4
E
)
Ö
Ü
¢
@
4
%
&
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¥
+
$
&
%
'
·
+
,
;
K
L
k
2
m
n
o
/
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
:
4
6
²
* :  
-
M
N
O
]
}
ì
¥
4
>
Z
ø
e
1
+
>
.
^
~
Ä
Å
L
ƒ
*
+
Š
,
O
'
?
/
_
(
C-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
9.4 CP 775  
0
i
1
<
=
;
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
7
p
q
r
8
ˆ
9
É
æ
Æ
Ç
ö
A
}
B
!
C
.
D
a
c
E
Ó
ß
Æ
N
õ
Õ
µ
n
°
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
ü
é
~
ä
Ÿ
å
c
l
¦
"
2
0
/
±
)
ó
Z
z
#
*
1
À
C
E
Ž
<
5
7
8
¨
e
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
¾
§
÷
Ë
Ê
Í
§
0
8
9
6
7
2
)
©
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
š
z
3
ä
â
9
6
=
;
š
å
u
ž
-
¢
"
G
H
I
g
h
i
S
s
|
3
©
®
¬
½
¼
L
*
+
E
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
±
@
4
%
&
*
J
j
Î
+
$
&
%
'
.
,
+
,
;
K
L
k
2
m
n
o
Ï
·
<
=
>
?
\
|
§
z
Ä
Å
:
Ã
³
* :  
-
M
N
O
]
}
Ø
x
4
>
Z
²
+
>
.
^
~
Š
,
Â
´
O
'
?
/
_
¤
(
C-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Character Set Tables  
9.5 BATIC RIM  
0
i
1
<
=
;
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
7
p
q
r
8
,
9
A
B
E
±
²
C
A
¨
D
Š
N
Â
Ó
Æ
Õ
Ö
x
E
a
F
š
n
Ã
ó
Ç
õ
ö
÷
å
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
6
3
©
)
¢
}
~
c
ä
å
e
Ì
.
#
$
%
&
*
(
s
t
£
³
C
Ä
Å
E
?
Ë
Ê
Í
§
0
8
9
6
7
2
¤
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
?
|
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
Ø
©
Î
3
ø
¹
C
É
Z
Ž
š
ä
c
é
z
)
<
>
L
l
4
%
&
*
J
j
Ï
S
â
s
ã
+
,
;
K
L
k
2
m
n
o
*
¬
+
¼
½
¾
æ
<
=
>
?
\
|
U
Z
u
z
ž
* :  
-
M
N
O
]
}
°
±
§
·
+
>
.
^
~
®
¦
Ž
'
?
/
_
Æ
ß
C-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Reference  
This appendix contains basic information on the IBM ProPrinter XL 24 Emulation  
commands supported in the Printer:  
Characters used in control functions appear in monospaced type. Table 1  
explains some of the conventions used.  
A pair of numbers separated by a slash ( / ) character indicates Column/Row  
notation. This notation refers to the location of a character in a standard code  
table, such as ASCII. (example: 1/B = 1B is the hex-code for Escape)  
Spaces appear between characters in sequence for clarity; they are not part of  
the format.  
At the end of this chapter you will find a listing of the IBM ProPrinter Emulation  
commands classified by Hex Code and a Hex - Decimal conversion table.  
The following conventions are used in the command listings:  
Table 1 Conventions  
ESC  
Pn  
Escape (1/B), introduces an escape sequence  
Numeric parameter, or number of units that specify a distance or  
quantity pertaining to the escape sequence, control function or control  
string. Accepted values are 0...9999, may be preceded by + or -.  
If the parameter is in normal notation like "200" the programming in hex-  
code is according to a ASCII table. ("200" = 32,30,30 in hex).  
If the parameter must be programmed in hex-code the notation is with a  
slash. (1/A = 1A in hex-code)  
v1...vn A series of parameters pertaining to the escape sequence, control  
function or control string.  
SP  
Is standing for Space (hex 20)  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 2: Control Codes  
Column/Row  
Mnemonic  
Function  
0/0  
NUL  
BS  
Null  
0/8  
Backspace  
0/9  
HT  
Horizontal Tab  
0/A  
LF  
Line Feed  
0/B  
VT  
Vertical Tab  
0/C  
FF  
Form Feed  
0/D  
CR  
Carriage Return  
Double Width Printing By Line  
Condensed Printing (17.1 cpi)  
Select Printer  
0/E  
SO  
0/F  
SI  
1/1  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
CAN  
ESC  
SP  
1/2  
Select Pica (10 cpi)  
Buffer Data Flow Control  
Cancel Double Width Printing By Line  
Cancel Buffer  
1/3  
1/4  
1/8  
1/B  
Initiate Escape Sequence  
Space  
2/0  
7/F  
DEL  
ESC Q #  
ESC Q $  
Delete  
1/B 5/1 2/3  
1/B 5/1 2/4  
Deselect Printer  
Deselect Printer  
D-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 3: Vertical Form Handling  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC 0  
Set Line Space to 1/8"  
ESC 1  
Set Line Space to 7/72"  
Start Variable Line Space  
Set Top of Form  
ESC 2  
ESC 4  
ESC 5 P1  
Carriage Return Function  
P1 = 1 or 0/1: select CR + LF  
P1 = 0 or 0/0: cancel CR  
ESC A P1  
Set Line Space to P1/72" (P1/60")  
P1 = P1/72" lpi (non AGM)  
P1 = P1/60" lpi (AGM)  
(P1 = 0/1...5/5)  
Note: Default = 12/72" or 6 lpi  
ESC B P1 P2 . . . P64 NUL  
Set Vertical Tabs  
(Pn = 0/1...F/F)  
ESC C P1  
Set Form Length in Lines (P1 = 0/1...7/F)  
Set Form Length in Inch (P1 = 0/1...1/6)  
ESC C NUL P1  
ESC N P1  
Set Automatic Perforation Skip  
P1: is the number of lines from bottom  
of paper to skip.  
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)  
ESC O  
Cancel Automatic Perforation Skip  
ESC [ \ EOT NUL NUL NUL P1 NUL  
Set Line Space Unit  
EOT = 0/4  
P1 = B/4 : select 1/180"  
P1 = D/8 : select 1/216"  
P1 = 0/0 : setting remains unchanged  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 3 (Cont.): Vertical Form Handling  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic  
Function  
ESC ]  
Reverse Line Feed  
ESC [ > P1 ; P2 ; P3 s SPSIF  
Native Command  
Select Paper Source and Insert  
Form (>), Print Gap, Paper Exit  
ESC [ P1 s  
SPS  
Paper Source:  
Native Command  
P1 = 0 : Manual Feed  
P1 = 1 : ASF, Bin 1  
P1 = 2 : ASF, Bin 2  
P1 = 3 : ASF, Bin 3  
P1 = 6 : upper Tractor  
P1 = 7 : Tractor Feed (lower Tractor)  
P1 = 8 : AFS, Bins 1 or 2  
P1 = 9 : ASF, Bins 2 or 3  
P1 = 10: ASF, Bins 1 or 2 or 3  
P1 = 15: upper and lower Tractor  
ESC [ ; P2 s  
Native Command  
AGC/PCC Procedure:  
P2 = 0 : Automatic Gap Control  
P2 = 1 : Print Gap for 1-ply copy  
P2 = 2 : Print Gap for 2-ply copies  
P2 = 3 : Print Gap for 3-ply copies  
P2 = 4 : Print Gap for 4-ply copies  
P2 = 5 : Print Gap for 5-ply copies  
P2 = 6 : Print Gap for 6-ply copies  
P2 = 7 : Print Gap for 7-ply copies  
ESC [ ; ; P3 s  
Paper Exit:  
Native Command  
P3 = 0 :  
reserved  
P3 = 1 or 2 : Paper Exit Front Side  
(manual)  
P3 = 3 :Batch output (rear), default  
P3 = 0 or 1: ignored  
D-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 4: Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC :  
Select Elite (12 cpi)  
ESC - P1  
Cancel / Select Underline  
P1 = 0/0 cancel Underline Printing  
P1 = 0/1 set Underline Printing  
ESC _ P1  
Cancel / Select Overline Printing  
P1 = 0/0 cancel Overline Printing  
P1 = 0/1 set Overline Printing  
ESC [ @ EOT NUL NUL NUL P1 P2 Double, Multiple -Width/ - Height Mode  
P1 controls line spacing (e.g. 0/x) and  
character height (e.g. x/0)  
P2 controls character width  
P1 = 0/x line spacing unchanged  
P1 = 1/x single line space  
P1 = 2/x double line space  
P1 = 3/x triple line space  
P1 = 4/x quadruple line space  
P1 = x/0 charcter height unchanged  
P1 = x/1 single charcter height  
P1 = x/2 double character height  
P1 = x/3 triple character height  
P1 = x/4 quadruple character height  
P2 = 0/0 character width unchanged  
P2 = 0/1 single character width  
P2 = 0/2 double character width  
P2 = 0/3 triple character width  
P2 = 0/4 quadruple character width  
Example:  
Coding to select "double line space", "double character  
height", and "double character width" in Hex:  
1B 5B 40 04 00 00 00 22 02  
D-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 4 (Cont.): Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC D P1 P2 ... P32 NUL  
Set Horizontal Tabs (P1...P32 = 0/1...F/F)  
Select Emphasized Printing (bold)  
Cancel Emphasized Printing (bold)  
Select Double Strike Printing (bold)  
Cancel Double Strike Printing  
ESC E  
ESC F  
ESC G  
ESC H  
ESC I P1  
Select Character Mode  
P1 = 0/0 : Draft, 10 cpi  
P1 = 0/1 : Draft, Proportional  
P1 = 0/2 : Courier, 10 cpi  
P1 = 0/3 : Courier, Proportional  
P1 = 0/8 : Draft, 12 cpi  
P1 = 0/A : Courier, 12 cpi  
P1 = 1/0 : Draft, 17 cpi  
P1 = 1/2 : Courier, 17 cpi  
ESC P P1  
Cancel / Select Proportional Printing  
P1 = 0/0 or 0 : cancel Proportional  
P1 = 0/1 or 1 : select Proportional  
ESC R  
Restore Horizontal Tabs to Default  
ESC S P1  
Select Superscript/Subscript  
P1 = 0/0 or 0 : select Superscript  
P1 = 0/1 or 1 : select Subscript  
D-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 4 (Cont.): Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC T  
Cancel Superscript/Subscript  
ESC U P1  
Cancel / Select Unidirectional Printing  
P1 = 0/0 or 0 : cancel Unidirectional  
P1 = 0/1 or 1 : select Unidirectional  
ESC W P1  
Cancel / Select Double Width  
P1 = 0/0 or 0 : cancel Double Width  
P1 = 0/1 or 1 : select Double Width  
ESC X P1 P2  
ESC d P1 P2  
Set Left and Right Margins  
P1 : Left Margin  
P2 : Right Margin  
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)  
Set Relative Horizontal Dot Position  
(P1 + P2 x 256)/120"  
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)  
ESC <  
ESC ;  
Home Position of Printhead (left margin)  
Set Left Margin at Current Position  
Select Print Quality LQ / NLQ  
ESC [ P1 SP r  
SPQ  
Native Command  
P1 = 0 :  
P1 = 1 :  
LQ  
NLQ; this is only valid if the  
NLQ type style is available.  
Draft  
P1 = 2 :  
P1 = 3 :  
HSD (High Speed Draft)  
Note:  
The LQ / NLQ selection becomes active  
if a LQ-/NLQ-font is selected.  
Draft / HSD becomes active if type style  
DATA is selected.  
D-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 4 (Cont.): Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic  
CPL  
Function  
ESC [ P1 ; P2 x  
Select Font and Character Pitch  
(parameter P1 or P2 may be skipped,  
see following alternative command  
sequences)  
Native Command  
ESC [ P1 x  
P1 selects the font  
possible format of  
Native Command CPL  
P1 = 0 or missing : Font is unchanged  
P1 = 1  
P1 = 2  
P1 = 3  
P1 = 4  
P1 = 5  
P1 = 6  
P1 = 7  
P1 = 8  
P1 = 9  
P1 = 10  
P1 = 11  
: Data  
: Roman  
: Sans Serif  
: Courier  
: Prestige  
: Script  
: OCR-B  
: OCR-A  
: Orator-C  
: Script  
: Data Large  
Note:  
Data Block is not available  
ESC [ ; P2 x  
P2 selects the character pitch  
possible format of  
Native Command CPL  
P2 = 0 or missing : Pitch is unchanged  
P2 = 1  
P2 = 2  
P2 = 3  
P2 = 4  
P2 = 5  
P2 = 6  
P2 = 7  
P2 = 8  
P2 = 9  
: 10 cpi  
: 12 cpi  
: 15 cpi  
: (proportional)  
: proportional  
: 14.4 cpi  
: 18 cpi  
: 17.1 cpi  
: 20 cpi  
D-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 5: Character Set Selection  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC 6  
Select Character Set 2  
ESC 7  
Select Character Set 1  
ESC \ P1 P2  
Print from All Character Set  
Number of codes = (P1 + P2 * 256)  
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)  
ESC ^ P1  
Print Single Character from All Character  
Set  
P1 = Number of Char. Set or Code Page  
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)  
ESC [ T n1 n2 NUL NUL P1 P2  
Code Page Switching  
n1 = 4, n2 = 0  
P1 P2 for Code-Page number, most  
significant byte first.  
P1 P2  
1
3
3
3
3
3
181 : CP 437 U.S.A.  
82 : CP 850 Multilingual  
90 : CP 858 Multilingual + Euro  
92 : CP 860 Portugal  
95 : CP 863 Canada - French  
97 : CP 865 Norway  
D-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 6: Graphics Modes  
Escape Sequence  
ESC 3 P1  
Mnemonic Function  
Set Line Space to P1 216" (P1/180")  
/
P1  
/
/
216 lpi (non AGM),  
180 lpi (AGM)  
P1  
(P1 = 0/1...F/F)  
ESC J P1  
Perform P1 216" (P1/180") Line Feed  
/
P1  
/
/
216 lpi (non AGM),  
P1  
180 lpi (AGM)  
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)  
ESC K P1 P2 v1 . . . vn  
ESC L P1 P2 v1 . . . vn  
ESC Y P1 P2 v1 . . . vn  
ESC Z P1 P2 v1 . . . vn  
Standard Density Graphics Mode *)  
(P1 + P2 * 256) = number of data  
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)  
Double Density Graphics Mode *)  
(P1 + P2 * 256) = number of data  
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)  
Double Speed & Density Graphics Mode *)  
(P1 + P2 * 256) = number of data  
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)  
Quadruple Density Graphics Mode *)  
(P1 + P2 * 256) = number of data  
(Pn = 0/0...F/F)  
*) consecutive horizontal dots cannot be printed.  
D-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 6 (Cont.): Graphics Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC [ g P1 P2 P3 v1 . . . vn  
Select Various Graphics Modes (IBM)  
P1 + P2 * 256 = number of data  
bytes + 1  
(P1,P2 = 0/0...F/F)  
v1 .. vn = binary data in hex code  
Parameter Table Graphic Density:  
P3  
Graphic type  
dots  
per  
column  
8
max.  
of  
hor.  
vert.  
vert.  
density  
density density  
no AGM AGM  
columns ( dpi )  
0/0 Standard Density (K)  
0/1 Double Density (L)  
816  
1632  
1632  
3264  
816  
60  
72  
72  
60  
60  
8
120  
120  
240  
60  
0/2 2xDensity / 2xSpeed (Y) 8  
72  
60  
*)  
*)  
0/3 Quadruple Density (Z)  
0/8 Standard Density  
0/9 Double Density  
0/B Triple Density  
8
72  
60  
24  
24  
24  
24  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
1632  
2448  
4896  
120  
180  
360  
0/C Hex Density  
*)  
*) consecutive horizontal dots cannot be printed.  
Example: box 8x8 dots with center point 2x2 dots, standard density,  
8 dots / column  
hex: 1B 5B 67 09 00 00 FF 81 81 99 99 81 81 FF  
D-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 7: Further Control Sequences, supported by  
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC [  
$$  
Control String Introducer (CSI) for 'ESC ['  
ESC  
$$/  
Control String Introducer (CSI) for 'ESC'  
ESC * P1 P2 P3 v1 . . . vn  
Select Various Graphics Modes  
P2 + P3 * 256 = number of columns  
(P2,P3 = 0/0...F/F)  
v1 .. vn = binary data in hex code  
Parameter Table Graphic Density:  
P1  
Graphic type  
dots  
per  
column  
8
max.  
of  
hor.  
vert.  
vert.  
density  
density density  
no AGM AGM  
columns ( dpi )  
0/0 Standard Density (K)  
0/1 Double Density (L)  
0/2 2xDensity / 2xSpeed (Y) 8  
0/3 Quadruple Density (Z)  
0/4 CRT I  
0/5 Plotter  
816  
1632  
1632  
3264  
1088  
979  
60  
120  
120  
240  
80  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
60  
60  
60  
60  
60  
8
*)  
*)  
8
8
8
72  
72  
0/6 CRT II  
8
8
1224  
1958  
816  
1632  
1224  
2448  
4896  
90  
144  
60  
120  
90  
180  
360  
72  
72  
60  
0/B Double Density Plotter  
2/0 Standard Density  
2/1 Double Density  
2/6 CRT III  
2/7 Triple Density  
2/8 Hex Density  
*)  
*)  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
180  
*) consecutive horizontal dots cannot be printed.  
Example: box 8x8 dots with center point 2x2 dots, standard density,  
8 dots / column  
hex: 1B 2A 00 08 00 FF 81 81 99 99 81 81 FF  
D-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by  
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)  
Escape Sequence  
ESC [ P1 ; P2 w  
Mnemonic  
SNVCT  
Function  
Set National Version and Code Table  
P1 = 1 - 15 national version  
depending on selected character set (see  
Appendix C Char. Set Tables)  
P2 = 3 digit code of the code table (see  
command SCT)  
P1 for national version IBM SET 2:  
P1 = 1  
P1 = 2  
P1 = 3  
P1 = 4  
: U.S.A  
: France  
: Germany  
: U.K.  
P1 = 5  
P1 = 6  
P1 = 7  
: Denmark  
: Sweden  
: Italy  
P1 = 8  
P1 = 9  
: Spain  
: Japan  
P1 = 1 0  
P1 = 1 1  
P1 = 1 2  
P1 = 1 3  
P1 = 1 4  
: Norway  
: Denmark 2  
: Spain 2  
: Latin AM  
: Turkey  
P1 for IBM CODE PAGE:  
P1 for CODE PAGE EE:  
P1 = 1 : CP 437  
P1 = 2 : CP 850  
P1 = 3 : CP 860  
P1 = 4 : CP 863  
P1 = 5 : CP 865  
P1 = 6 : CP 858  
P1 = 1  
P1 = 2  
P1 = 3  
P1 = 4  
P1 = 5  
P1 = 6  
P1 = 7  
: CP 437 GK  
: CP 851 GK  
: CP 928 GK  
: CP 855 CYRI  
: CP 866  
: CP 869  
: CP 852  
P1 for CODE PAGE EE2:  
P1 = 1 : CP 771  
P1 = 2 : CP 773  
P1 = 3 : CP 774  
P1 = 4 : CP 775  
P1 = 8  
P1 = 9  
P1 = 1 0  
P1 = 1 1  
P1 = 1 2  
P1 = 1 3  
P1 = 1 4  
: KAMENICKY  
: ISO LATIN 2  
: MAZOVIA  
: CP 437 HUN  
: CP 852 SEE  
: CP 866 LAT  
: WIN LAT2  
P1 = 5 : CP BALTIC RIM  
ESC [ ; P2 w  
SCT  
Set Code Table  
P2 = 3 digit code of the code table  
P2 = 0 3 1 : ISO 8859/1; LATIN 1  
P2 = 0 3 1 : ISO 8859/15; LATIN 9  
P2 = 0 6 1 : IBM Set 1  
P2 = 0 6 2 : IBM Set 2  
P2 = 0 6 3 : IBM Code Page 1)  
P2 = 0 7 1 : EPSON Ext. G. C. T  
P2 = 1 0 0 : CODE PAGES EE  
P2 = 1 0 1 : CODE PAGES EE2  
1) depending on selected character set (P1) the IBM CODE PAGE 437, 850, 860,  
863, 865, or 858 (P1 = 6; P2 = 63) will be activated!  
D-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by  
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic  
SM #  
Function  
ESC [ P1 ; P2 SP r  
Select Macro and Change Emulation  
P1 = 1: Macro 1  
P1 = 2: Macro 2  
P1 = 3: Macro 3  
P1 = 4: Macro 4  
P2 = 0: no change of emulation  
P2 = 2: IBM ProPrinter Emulation  
P2 = 3: IBM ProPrinter AGM Emulation  
P2 = 4: EPSON Emulation  
ESC M  
RLF  
EJF  
Reverse Line Feed  
Eject Form  
ESC [ < s  
ESC [ P1 ; P2 SP B  
GSM  
Graphic Size Modification  
P1 = 1 0 0 / P2 = 1 0 0 : normal height / width  
P1 = 2 0 0 / P2 = 2 0 0 : double height / width  
P1 = 3 0 0 / P2 = 3 0 0 : triple height / width  
P1 = 4 0 0 / P2 = 4 0 0 : quadruple height / width  
P1 and P2 max. = 8 0 0 in steps of 100  
Graphic Size Modification for DATA LARGE  
P1 = 1 0 0 / P2 = 1 0 0 : normal height / width  
P1 and P2 max. 9 9 0 0 in steps of 100  
ESC [ P1 `  
ESC [ P1 a  
ESC [ P1 b  
HPA  
HPR  
RPT  
Set Horizontal Position Absolute  
P1 = print column  
(P1 = 0...9999)  
Set Horizontal Position Relative  
P1 = print column  
(P1 = 0...9999)  
Repeat Character  
P1 = number of repetitions (P1 = 1...999)  
D-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by  
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC [ P1 d  
ESC [ P1 e  
ESC [ P1 g  
VPA  
VPR  
TBC  
Set Vertical Position Absolute  
P1 = 0 or 1: Top of Form / Top Margin  
P1 = 2... 9999: Vertical Line  
Set Vertical Position Relative  
P1 = 0 or 1: moves the position one line  
P1 = 2... 9999: Vertical Line  
Tabulation Clear  
P1 = 0:  
at active print pos. all tabs  
and margin marker,  
all horizontal-,  
P1 = 3:  
P1 = 4:  
all vertical tabs and margin  
marker  
ESC [ P1 w  
SNV  
LSL  
Set National Version  
P1 = 1 - 15 national version  
depending on selected character set  
(see SNVCT and Appendix C Character  
Set Tables)  
ESC [ P1 {  
Line Space Load  
P1 =  
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 48,  
60, 72, 90, 144, 180, 360  
D-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by  
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)  
Escape Sequence  
ESC [ P1 m  
Mnemonic Function  
SGR  
Set Graphic Rendition  
P1 = 0: default - no rendition or  
rendition reset  
P1 = 1: bold  
P1 = 3: italics  
P1 = 4: underline  
P1 = 9: crossed out or strike through  
printing  
P1 = 20: enlarged double width printing  
P1 = 21: double underline  
P1 = 22: bold reset  
P1 = 23: italics reset  
P1 = 24: underline reset  
P1 = 29: crossed out reset  
P1 = 30 to 36: ignored  
P1 = 53: over lined  
P1 = 55: over lined reset  
D-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Table 7 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by  
IBM Emulation Mode (Native Commands)  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 SP z  
see Appendix F  
BH  
Barcode Header  
BARCODE Programming  
P2: Barcode typ  
P3: Height of barcode  
P4: Width of the thin bars  
P5: Width of the thin gaps  
P6: Ratio width to thin (bars / gaps)  
P7: Uni-directional or bi-directional  
printing  
0 : or not programmed: means no  
changes  
1 : uni-directional printing in LQ  
2 : bi-directional printing in LQ  
3 : uni-directional printing in NLQ  
4 : bi-directional printing in NLQ  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
SMBC  
RSBC  
Set Mode Barcode  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Reset Mode Barcode  
D-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Hex Code  
Format  
Page  
00  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
11  
12  
13  
14  
18  
1B  
20  
7F  
Null  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
Backspace  
Horizontal Tab  
Line Feed  
Vertical Tab  
Form Feed  
Carriage Return  
Select Double Width (one line)  
Select Condensed Mode (17,1 cpi)  
Select Printer  
Select Pica (10 cpi)  
Buffer Data Flow Control  
Cancel Double Width  
Cancel Buffer  
Escape  
Space  
Delete  
1B 30  
1B 31  
1B 32  
1B 34  
1B 36  
1B 37  
1B 3A  
1B 3B  
1B 3C  
1B 45  
1B 46  
1B 47  
1B 48  
1B 4D  
1B 4F  
1B 52  
Set Line Space to 1/8"  
Set Line Space to 7/72"  
D-3  
D-3  
D-3  
D-3  
D-9  
D-9  
D-5  
D-7  
D-7  
D-6  
D-6  
D-6  
D-6  
D-14  
D-3  
D-6  
Start Variable Line Space  
Set Top Of Form  
Select Character Set 2  
Select CHaracter Set 1  
Select Elite (12 cpi)  
Set Left Margin at Current  
Home Position of Printhead  
Select Emphasized Printing (bold)  
Cancel Emphasized Printing  
Select Double Strike (bold)  
Cancel Double Strike  
Reverse Line Feed  
Cancel Automatic Perforation Skip  
Restore Horizontal Tabs to Default  
D-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Page  
Hex Code  
Format  
1B 54  
Cancel Superscript/Subscript  
Reverse Line Feed  
D-7  
1B 5D  
24 24  
D-4  
Control String Introducer for ESC [  
Control String Introducer for ESC  
D-12  
D-12  
24 24 2F  
1B 2D 00  
1B 33 P1  
1B 35 01  
1B 41 P1  
1B 43 P1  
1B 49 P1  
1B 4A P1  
1B 4E P1  
1B 50 00  
/
1B 2D 01  
1B 35 00  
Cancel / Select / Underline  
/
Set Line Space to P1 216" (P1/180")  
D-5  
D-10  
D-3  
D-3  
D-3  
D-6  
D-10  
D-3  
/
Carriage Return Function  
Set Line Space to P1/72" (P1/60")  
Set Form Length in Lines  
Select Character Mode  
Perform P1/216" (P1/180") Line feed  
Set Automatic Perforation Skip  
/
1B 50 01  
Cancel / Select Proportional Printing D-6  
1B 51 23 or 1B 51 24  
Deselect Printer  
D-2  
D-6  
1B 53 00  
1B 55 00  
1B 57 00  
1B 5E P1  
1B 5F 00  
/
/
/
1B 53 01  
1B 55 01  
1B 57 01  
Select Superscript / Subscipt  
Cancel / Select Unidirectional Printing D-7  
Cancel / Select Double Width  
Single Character from All Char. Set  
Cancel / Select Overline Printing  
D-7  
D-9  
D-5  
/
1B 5F 01  
1B 2A P1 P2 P3 data  
1B 42 P1....P64 00  
1B 43 00 P1  
Select Various Graphics Modes  
Set Vertical Tabs  
D-12  
D-3  
Set Form Lenght in Inches  
Set Horizontal Tabs  
D-3  
1B 44 P1...Pn 00  
1B 4B P1 P2 data  
1B 4C P1 P2 data  
1B 58 P1 P2  
D-6  
Standard Density Graphics Mode  
Double Density Graphics Mode  
Set Left and Right Margins  
D-10  
D-10  
D-7  
1B 59 P1 P2 data  
Double Speed & Double Density  
Graphics Mode  
D-10  
1B 5A P1 P2 data  
1B 5B 3B P2 73  
1B 5B 3B P2 77  
Quadruple density Graphics Mode  
AGC / PCC Procedure  
Set Code Table  
D-10  
D-4  
D-13  
D-17  
1B 5B 3B P2 3B P3 3B P4 3B P5 3B Barcode Header  
P6 3B P7 20 7A  
D-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Hex Code  
Format  
Page  
1B 5B 3C 73  
Eject Form  
Insert Form  
D-14  
D-4  
1B 5B 3E 73  
1B 5B 3E P1 3B P2 3B P3 73  
1B 5B 3F 30 68  
1B 5B 3F 30 6C  
1B 5B 40 04 00 00 00 P1 P2  
1B 5B 54 n1 n2 NUL NUL P1 P2  
1B 5B 5C 04 00 00 00 P1 00  
1B 5B 67 P1 P2 P3 data  
1B 5B P1 20 58  
1B 5B P1 3B P2 20 72  
1B 5B P1 3B P2 20 42  
1B 5B P1 3B P2 77  
1B 5B P1 3B P2 78  
1B 5B P1 60  
Select Paper Source and Insert Form D-4  
Set Mode Barcode  
D-17  
D-17  
Reset Mode Barcode  
Double, Multible -Width/-Height Mode D-5  
Code Page Switching  
Set Line Space Unit  
D-9  
D-3  
Select Various Graphics Modes (IBM) D-11  
Select Print Quality LQ / NLQ D-7  
Select Macro and Change Emulation D-14  
Graphic Size Modification D-14  
Set National Version and Code Table D-13  
Select Font and Character Pitch  
Set Horizontal Position Absolute  
Set Horizontal Position Relative  
Repeat Character  
D-8  
D-14  
D-14  
D-14  
D-15  
D-15  
D-15  
D-16  
D-4  
1B 5B P1 61  
1B 5B P1 62  
1B 5B P1 64  
Set Vertical Position Absolute  
Set Vertical Position Relative  
Tabulation Clear  
1B 5B P1 65  
1B 5B P1 67  
1B 5B P1 6D  
Set Graphic Rendition  
1B 5B P1 73  
Select Paper Source  
1B 5B P1 77  
Set National Version  
D-15  
D-15  
D-9  
1B 5B P1 7B  
Line Space Load  
1B 5C P1 P2  
Print from All Character Set  
Set Relative Horizontal Dot Position  
1B 64 P1 P2  
D-7  
D-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D IBM ProPrinter Quick Refernce  
Hex - Decimal Conversion Table  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240  
97 113 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 241  
98 114 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 242  
99 115 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 243  
2
3
4
84 100 116 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244  
85 101 117 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245  
86 102 118 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246  
87 103 119 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247  
88 104 120 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248  
89 105 121 137 153 269 185 201 217 233 249  
90 106 122 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250  
91 107 123 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251  
92 108 124 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252  
93 109 125 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 253  
94 110 126 142 158 174 190 206 222 238 254  
95 111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
D-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
This appendix contains basic information on the EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2  
Printer Emulation:  
Characters used in control functions appear in monospaced type. Table 1  
explains some of the conventions used.  
A pair of numbers separated by a slash ( / ) character indicates Column/Row  
notation. This notation refers to the location of a character in a standard code  
table, such as ASCII. (example: 1/B = 1B is the hex-code for Escape)  
Spaces appear between characters in sequence for clarity; they are not part of  
the format.  
At the end of this chapter you will find a listing of the EPSON LQ 2550 and  
ESC/P2 Emulation commands classified by Hex Code and a Hex - Decimal  
conversion table.  
The following conventions are used in the command listings:  
Table 1 Conventions  
ESC  
P1  
Escape (1/B), introduces an escape sequence  
Numeric parameter, or number of units that specify a distance or  
quantity pertaining to the escape sequence, control function or control  
string. Accepted values are 0...9999, may be preceded by + or -.  
If the parameter is in normal notation like "200" the programming in hex-  
code is according to a ASCII table. ("200" = 32,30,30 in hex).  
If the parameter must be programmed in hex-code the notation is with a  
slash. (1/A = 1A in hex-code)  
v1...vn A series of parameters pertaining to the escape sequence, control  
function or control string.  
SP  
Is standing for Space (hex 20)  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 2: Control Codes  
Column/Row  
Mnemonic  
Function  
0/0  
0/8  
0/9  
0/A  
0/B  
0/C  
0/D  
0/E  
0/F  
1/1  
1/2  
1/3  
1/4  
1/8  
1/B  
2/0  
7/F  
NUL  
BS  
Null  
Backspace  
HT  
Horizontal Tab  
Line Feed  
LF  
VT  
Vertical Tab  
FF  
Form Feed  
CR  
Carriage Return  
Double Width Printing By Line  
Condensed Printing  
Select Printer  
SO  
SI  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
CAN  
ESC  
SP  
Select Pica (10 cpi)  
Deselct Printer  
Cancel Double Width Printing By Line  
Cancel Buffer  
Initiate Escape Sequence  
Space  
DEL  
Delete  
Table 3: Terminal Management  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic  
Function  
ESC @  
ESC =  
ESC >  
ESC #  
Initialize Printer  
Set Most Significant Bit to 0  
Set Most Significant Bit to 1  
Cancel Most Significant Bit Control  
E-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Vertical Form Handling  
The printer is always equipped with two continuous form tractors. The last sheet  
of a continuous form stack can be printed on up to the end of the form.  
The capabillity of the printer to feed paper from different sources is optimally  
supplemented by the option that automatically adjust the distance between the  
print head and the print bar.  
Table 4: Vertical Form Handling  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC 0  
Set Line Space to 1/8"  
Set Line Space to 1/6"  
ESC 2  
ESC 3 P1  
Set Line Space to P1  
Set Line Space to P1  
/
"
"
(P1 =0/ 0...F/F)  
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)  
(P1 = 0/0...7/F)  
180  
ESC + P1  
/
360  
ESC A P1  
Set Line Space to P1/60"  
Clear Vertical Tabs  
Set Vertical Tabs  
ESC B NUL  
ESC B P1 P2 . . . P16 NUL  
ESC C P1  
(P1...P16 = 0/1...F/F)  
Set Form Length in Lines  
(P1 = 0/1...7/F)  
ESC C NUL P1  
ESC J P1  
Set Form Length in Inches (P1 = 0/1...1/6)  
Perform P1  
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)  
/
180" Line Feed  
ESC N P1  
Set Automatic Perforation Skip  
P1 is the number of lines from bottom of  
paper to skip.  
(P1 = 0/1...7/F)  
ESC O  
Cancel Automatic Perforation Skip  
ESC b P1 P2 .. P16 NUL  
Set Vertical Tabs in Channel P1  
P1 = 0/0 .. 0/7 : channel 0 - 7  
P2..P16 = line number (P2..P16 = 0/1..F/F)  
E-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 4: (Cont.) Vertical Form Handling  
Escape Sequence  
ESC b P1 NUL  
ESC j P1  
Mnemonic Function  
Clear all Tabs in Channel P1  
P1 = 0/0 .. 0/7 : channel 0 - 7  
Perform P1  
/
180" Reverse Line Feed  
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)  
ESC / P1  
Select Vertical Tab Channel  
P1 = 0/0 .. 0/7 : channel 0 .. 7  
ESC EM P1  
Form Feed and ASF Control  
Form Feed: EM = 1/9  
ASF Control:  
P1 = 3/1:  
P1 = 3/2:  
P1 = 3/3:  
ASF Bin 1 or Bin 2  
ASF Bin 2 or Bin 3  
ASF Bin1 or Bin 2 or Bin 3  
P1 = R: (5/2) eject sheet  
ESC [ > P1 ; P2 ; P3 s SPSIF  
Native Command  
Select Paper Source and Insert Form,  
Print Gap, Paper Exit (any parameter > or  
P1 to P4 may be skipped, see following  
alternative command sequences);  
> = Insert Form  
ESC [ P1 s  
SPS  
Paper Source:  
Native Command  
P1 = 3/0  
P1 = 3/1  
P1 = 3/2  
P1 = 3/3  
P1 = 3/6  
P1 = 3/7  
P1 = 3/8  
P1 = 3/9  
: Manual Feed  
: ASF, select Bin 1  
: ASF, select Bin 2  
: ASF, select Bin 3  
: select upper Tractor  
: select lower Tractor  
: ASF, Bin 1 or Bin 2  
: ASF, Bin 2 or Bin 3  
P1 = 3/1 3/0 : ASF, Bin1 or Bin 2 or Bin 3  
P1 = 3/1 3/5 : upper and lower Tractor  
E-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 4: (Cont.) Vertical Form Handling  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC [ ; P2 s  
Native Command,  
AGC/PCC Print Gap Control:  
P2 = 3/0 : Automatic Gap Control  
P2 = 3/1 : Print Gap for 1-ply copy  
P2 = 3/2 : Print Gap for 2-ply copies  
P2 = 3/3 : Print Gap for 3-ply copies  
P2 = 3/4 : Print Gap for 4-ply copies  
P2 = 3/5 : Print Gap for 5-ply copies  
P2 = 3/6 : Print Gap for 6-ply copies  
P2 = 3/7 : Print Gap for 7-ply copies  
ESC [ ; ; P3 s  
Paper Exit:  
Native Command  
P3 = 0 :  
reserved  
P3 = 1 or 2 : Paper Exit Front Side  
(manual)  
P3 = 3 :  
Batch output (rear), default  
P3 = 0 or 1 : ignored  
E-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 5: Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC SO  
Select Double Width for One Line  
ESC SI  
Select Condensed  
10 cpi -> 17 cpi  
12 cpi -> 20 cpi  
15 cpi -> 15 cpi (unchanged)  
proportional -> proportional cond.  
ESC SP P1  
Select Intercharacter Space  
Unit 1/120" for DRAFT  
Unit 1/180" for NLQ/LQ  
(P1 = 0/0...7/F)  
(P1 = 0/0...7/F)  
ESC ! P1  
Select Multiple Print Mode  
P1 selects:  
Bit 0 = 0 : 10 cpi (Pica)  
Bit 0 = 1 : 12 cpi (Elite)  
Bit 1 = 1 : proportional  
Bit 2 = 1 : Condensed  
Bit 3 = 1 : Emphasized  
Bit 4 = 1 : Double Strike  
Bit 5 = 1 : Double Width  
Bit 6 = 1 : Italics  
Bit 7 = 1 : Underline  
ESC $ P1 P2  
ESC \ P1 P2  
Set Absolute Horizontal Position  
(P1 + P2 * 256) * 1/60"  
(P1 = 0/0...F/F)  
(P2 = 0/0...0/3)  
Set Relative Horizontal Position  
Draft:  
(P1 + P2 * 256) * 1/120  
(P1 = 0/0...F/F) (P2 = 0/0...0/6)  
NLQ/LQ: (P1 + P2 * 256) * 1/180  
"
"
(P1 = 0/0...F/F) (P2 = 0/0...0/3)  
ESC % P1  
Select Standard / User Defined Character  
Set  
P1 = 0/0 : Standard Character Set  
P1 = 0/1 : User Defined Character Set  
E-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 5 (Cont.): Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence Function  
ESC & NUL P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 v1 .. vn  
Define User Defined Characters  
P1 = first code table position  
(P1 = 0/0...P2)  
P2 = last code table position  
P3 = front space  
(P2 = P1...7/F)  
(P3 = 0/0...5/0)  
P4 = body length  
Draft: (P4 = 0/0...0/F)  
LQ: (P4 = 0/0...2/5)  
(P5 = 0/0...5/0)  
P5 = rear space  
v1 .. vn = binary data in hex  
(vn = 0/0...F/F)  
Notes:  
)
This Command defines one or more characters in a RAM character  
table.  
S All User Defined Characters are erased when the printer is  
switched off.  
S Set the Interface Buffer to 1k or 8K (max 50 defined char in LQ,  
128 in draft), or use a RAM card for up to 128 User Defined  
Characters in LQ.  
S Set maximum every second dot to "1" in a horizontal line !  
S User Defined Characters can be defined in four different print  
modes:  
resolution (vertical x horizontal)  
Normal Size with Draft:  
24 x 15  
24 x 37  
16 x 15  
16 x 37  
Normal Size with LQ / proport.:  
Sub-/ Superscript with Draft:  
Sub-/ Superscript with LQ / proport.:  
S The characters can only be activated in the same mode as defined.  
S The character layout is coded in three bytes (24 bit vertical) or two  
bytes (16 bit vertical) per column, top to bottom.  
S To print the character change to the User Defined Character Set  
with ESC % .  
Examlpe: vertical box, normal size with draft at code table position "41"  
(P3=8, P4=5, P5=8)  
hex: 1B 26 00 41 41 08 05 08 FF FF FF 00 00 00 80 00 01 00 00 00 FF FF FF  
E-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC ( - P1 P2 P3 P4 P5  
Select Line Marking  
P1 = 0/3  
P2 = 0/0  
P3 = 0/1  
(fixed value)  
(fixed value)  
(fixed value)  
P4 = 0/1 : underline  
P4 = 0/2 : strike through  
P4 = 0/3 : overscore  
P5 = 0/0 : cancel score line selected by P4  
P5 = 0/1 : single continuous line  
P5 = 0/2 : double continuous line  
P5 = 0/5 : single broken line  
P5 = 0/6 : double broken line  
ESC 4  
Set Italics  
ESC 5  
Cancel Italics  
ESC <  
Select Unidirectional Mode (one line)  
ESC : NUL P1 NUL  
Copy ROM Character Set to RAM  
P1 = 0/0 : ROMAN  
P1 = 0/1 : SANS SERIF  
P1 = 0/2 : COURIER  
P1 = 0/3 : PRESTIGE  
P1 = 0/4 : SCRIPT  
P1 = 0/5 : OCR-B  
P1 = 0/6 : OCR-A  
P1 = 0/7 : ORATOR-C  
P1 = 0/8 : ORATOR  
ESC - P1  
Underline Printing  
P1 = 0/1 : set Underline Printing  
P1 = 0/0 : cancel Underline Printing  
ESC D NUL  
Clear Horizontal Tabs  
E-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC D P1 P2 . . . P32 NUL  
Set Horizontal Tabs  
P1 ... P32 = tab position  
(Pn = 0/1..F/F)  
ESC E  
Select Emphasized Printing (bold)  
Cancel Emphasized Printing  
Select Double Strike Printing (bold)  
Cancel Double Strike Printing  
Select Elite (12 cpi)  
ESC F  
ESC G  
ESC H  
ESC M  
ESC P  
Select Pica (10 cpi)  
ESC Q P1  
ESC S P1  
Set Right Margin  
(P1 = 0/4 ... F/F)  
Select Superscript/Subscript  
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : select Superscript  
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select Subscript  
ESC T  
Cancel Superscript/Subscript  
ESC U P1  
Cancel/Select Unidirectional Printing  
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : cancel Unidirectional  
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select Unidirectional  
ESC W P1  
ESC a P1  
Cancel/Select Double Width  
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : cancel Double Width  
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select Double Width  
Select Justification  
P1 = 0/0 : select left justification  
P1 = 0/1 : center between margins  
P1 = 0/2 : select right justification  
P1 = 0/3 : select full justification  
E-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC g  
Select Pitch 15 cpi  
ESC k P1  
Select Font  
P1 = 0/0 : ROMAN  
P1 = 0/1 : SANS SERIF  
P1 = 0/2 : COURIER  
P1 = 0/3 : PRESTIGE  
P1 = 0/4 : SCRIPT  
P1 = 0/5 : OCR-B  
P1 = 0/6 : OCR-A  
P1 = 0/7 : ORATOR-C  
P1 = 0/8 : ORATOR  
P1 = 1/1 : DATA LARGE  
ESC l P1  
Set Left Margin  
(P1 = 0/0...F/C)  
ESC p P1  
Cancel/Select Proportional  
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : cancel proportional  
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select proportional  
ESC q P1  
Select Character Style  
P1 = 0/0 : normal style  
P1 = 0/1 : outline  
P1 = 0/2 : shadow  
P1 = 0/3 : outline + shadow  
E-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
ESC w P1  
Mnemonic Function  
Cancel/Select Double Height  
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : cancel  
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select  
ESC x P1  
Select Character Quality  
P1 = 0/0 or 3/0 : select Draft  
P1 = 0/1 or 3/1 : select LQ or  
NLQ dep. on set-up  
ESC [ P1 ; P2 SP B  
GSM  
Graphic Size Modification  
Native Command,  
P1 = 1 0 0 / P2 = 1 0 0 : normal height / width  
P1 = 2 0 0 / P2 = 2 0 0 : double height / width  
P1 = 3 0 0 / P2 = 3 0 0 : triple height / width  
P1 = 4 0 0 / P2 = 4 0 0 : quadruple height / width  
P1 and P2 max. = 8 0 0 in steps of 100  
Graphic Size Modification for DATA LARGE  
P1 = 1 0 0 / P2 = 1 0 0 : normal height / width  
P1 and P2 max. 9 9 0 0 in steps of 100  
E-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 5: (Cont.) Horizontal Form Handling and Printing Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC [ P1 ; P2 x  
CPL  
Select Font and Character Pitch (any  
Native Command,  
parameter P1 or P2 may be skipped,  
see following alternative command  
sequences)  
ESC [ P1 x  
P1 selects the font:  
possible format of  
Native Command CPL  
P1 = 0 or missing : Font is unchanged  
P1 = 1  
P1 = 2  
P1 = 3  
P1 = 4  
P1 = 5  
P1 = 6  
P1 = 7  
P1 = 8  
P1 = 9  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
DATA  
ROMAN  
SANS SERIF  
COURIER  
PRESTIGE  
SCRIPT  
OCR-B  
OCR-A  
ORATOR-C  
P1 = 10 : ORATOR  
P1 = 11 : DATA LARGE  
Note:  
Data Block is not available  
ESC [ ; P2 x  
P2 selects the character pitch:  
possible format of  
Native Command CPL  
P2 = 0 or missing : Pitch is unchanged  
P2 = 1  
P2 = 2  
P2 = 3  
P2 = 4  
P2 = 5  
P2 = 6  
P2 = 7  
P2 = 8  
P2 = 9  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
10 cpi  
12 cpi  
15 cpi  
proportional  
proportional  
14.4 cpi  
18 cpi  
17.1 cpi  
20 cpi  
E-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 6: Graphics Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC ? K P1  
ESC ? L P1  
ESC ? Y P1  
ESC ? Z P1  
Reassign Graphics Mode K 1)  
Standard Density, 8 dpc  
Reassign Graphics Mode L 1)  
Double Density, 8 dot per column  
Reassign Graphics Mode Y 1)  
Double Density & -Speed, 8 dot per col.  
Reassign Graphics Mode Z 1)  
Quadruple Density, 8 dot per column  
ESC K P2 P3 v1 . . . vn  
ESC L P2 P3 v1 . . . vn  
ESC Y P2 P3 v1 . . . vn  
Standard Density Graphics Mode 1)  
Double Density Graphics Mode 1)  
Double Density / Double Speed  
Graphics Mode 1)  
ESC Z P2 P3 v1 . . . vn  
Quadruple Density Graphics Mode 1)  
1) : for coding of P1, P2, P3 see ESC * on the next page  
E-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 6: (Cont.) Graphics Modes  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC * P1 P2 P3 v1 . . . vn  
Select Various Graphics Modes  
P2 + P3 * 256 = number of columns  
(0/0...F/F)  
(0/0...F/F)  
v1 .. vn = binary data in hex code  
Parameter Table Graphic Density:  
P1 Graphic type  
dots /  
max. number hor. density  
column of columns  
( dpi )  
60  
0/0 Standard Density (K)  
0/1 Double Density (L)  
0/2 2xDensity / 2xSpeed (Y)  
0/3 Quadruple Density (Z)  
0/4 CRT I  
8
816  
8
8
8
8
1632  
1632  
3264  
1088  
1224  
816  
1632  
1224  
2448  
4896  
120  
120  
240  
80  
90  
60  
120  
90  
180  
360  
*)  
*)  
0/6 CRT II  
8
2/0 Standard Density  
2/1 Double Density  
2/6 CRT III  
2/7 Triple Density  
2/8 Hex Density  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
*)  
*) consecutive horizontal dots cannot be printed.  
Example: box 8x8 dots with center point 2x2 dots, standard density, 8 dots /  
column  
hex: 1B 2A 00 08 00 FF 81 81 99 99 81 81 FF  
E-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 7: Character Set Selection  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC 6  
Enlarge Print Code Area (128-159 dec.)  
Enable Upper Control Code (128-159 dec.)  
ESC 7  
ESC R P1  
Select National Version  
P1 = 0/0 : U.S.A.  
P1 = 0/1 : FRANCE  
P1 = 0/2 : GERMANY  
P1 = 0/3 : U.K.  
P1 = 0/4 : DENMARK  
P1 = 0/5 : SWEDEN  
P1 = 0/6 : ITALY  
P1 = 0/7 : SPAIN  
P1 = 0/8 : JAPAN  
P1 = 0/9 : NORWAY  
P1 = 0/A : DENMARK 2  
P1 = 0/B : SPAIN 2  
P1 = 0/C : LATIN AM.  
P1 = 0/D : TURKEY  
P1 = 4/0 : LEGAL  
ESC t P1  
Select Character Table  
P1 = 0/0 : Italics Character Table  
P1 = 0/1 : Extended Graphics Character  
Table  
P1 = 0/2 : User Defined Character Table  
E-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 8: ESC / P2 Commands  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC ( c P1 P2 P3 P4 P5  
Set page format  
Sets top and bottom margins in the defined  
units.  
P1 =  
tm =  
04 00  
P2 + P3 x 256  
tm: top margin in units tm  
bm = P4 + P5 x 256  
bm: bottom margin in units bm  
ESC ( C P1 P2 P3  
ESC ( V P1 P2 P3  
Set page length in defined unit  
Define page length in units  
P1 =  
02 00  
pl = P2 + P3 x 256  
Set absolute vertical print position  
Define absolute vertical print position in units  
P1 =  
avpp = P2 + P3 x 256  
avpp: define print position from top  
margin in defined units  
02 00  
ESC ( v P1 P2 P3  
Set relative vertical print position  
Define relative vertical print position in units  
P1 =  
02 00  
rvpp = P2 + P3 x 256  
rvpp: moves the print position in defined  
units.  
E-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 8: (Cont.) ESC / P2 Commands  
Escape Sequence  
ESC X P1 P2 P3  
Function  
Select font by pitch and point  
P1 = 0 : No change in pitch  
P1 = 1 : Selects proportional spacing  
P1 =  
18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 60 or 72  
Selects fixed pitch equal to 360/m  
cpi  
pz =  
pz:  
P2 + P3 x 256  
Point size in 0,5 points; 1 point  
equals 1/72 inch  
pz = 0: No change in point size  
pz =  
16, 20, 21, 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 42,  
44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64  
ESC ( U P1 P2  
ESC c P1 P2  
Set unit  
P1 =  
P2 =  
01 00  
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 /3600"  
10; Standard  
P2 =  
Set horizontal motion index (HMI)  
Define HMI-Index  
Change pitch value in n/360"-steps  
HMI =  
P1 + P2 x 256  
HMI max. 3 inch  
E-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 8: (Cont.) ESC / P2 Commands  
Escape Sequence  
Function  
ESC ( t n1 n2 Pn P1 P2  
Assign character table  
n1 = 3, n2 = 0  
Pn =  
Parameter of ESC t : 0, 1, 2, 3, "0",  
"1", "2" or "3"  
P1 P2 = character table  
0
1
3
7
8
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
italic  
PC 437 (USA)  
PC 850 (Multilingual)  
PC 860 (Portugal)  
PC 863 (French-Canada)  
PC 865 (Norway)  
ISO 8859-15; LATIN 9  
ISO 8859-1, LATIN 1  
PC 858 (Multilingual + Euro)  
29 15  
29 16  
44  
0
The character table assigned by Pn is  
one of the four tables which will be  
selected by the ESC t command.  
ESC t P1  
Select character table  
Selects the character table to be used  
for printing from among the four  
character tables which are assigned by  
ESC ( t command.  
Pn = 0/0 or 3/0 : Character Table 0  
Pn = 0/1 or 3/1 : Character Table 1  
Pn = 0/2 or 3/2 : Character Table 2  
Re-maps downloaded Characters  
from the positions 0 to 127 to the  
positions 128 to 255.  
Pn = 0/3 or 3/3 : Character Table 3  
Default Setting  
Pn = 0/0 or 3/0 : Italics Character Table  
Pn = 0/1 or 3/1 : CP 437  
Pn = 0/2 or 3/2 : User Defined Character  
Table  
Pn = 0/3 or 3/3 : CP 437  
E-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 8: (Cont.) ESC / P2 Commands  
Escape Sequence  
ESC ( ^ P1 P2  
Function  
Print data as characters  
Prints n data bytes as characters, not control  
codes  
pd = P1 + P2 x 256  
ESC ( G P1 P2  
Select graphics mode  
P1 =  
P2 =  
01 00  
1 or 49  
Graphics mode may be reset by ESC @.  
ESC . P1 P2 P 3 P4 P5 P6  
Print raster graphics  
P1 = 0 : graphics mode non compressed  
P1 = 1 : graphics mode compressed  
P2 = 10, 20 : vertical resolution in 3600/v DPI  
P3 = 10, 20 : horizontal resolution in 3600/h  
DPI  
P4 :  
vertical dot count (rows of dot  
graphics) 1 < P4 < 24  
horizont dot count (columns of dot  
graphics)  
hzd :  
hzd =  
P5 + P6 x 256  
Combination P2 = 10, P3 = 20 is not possible.  
E-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 9: Further Control Sequences, supported by  
EPSON LQ Emulation Mode (Native Commands)  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
$$  
$$  
Control String Introducer (CSI) for ESC [  
$$/  
$$/  
EJF  
control String Introducer for ESC  
ESC [ < s  
Eject Form; this command causes a  
vertical form feed to the beginning of the  
next page.  
ESC [ > s  
IF  
Insert Form  
ESC [ P1 SP X  
SPQ  
Select Print Quality  
P1 = 0: LQ  
P1 = 1: NLQ; this is only valid if the NLQ  
type style is selected.  
P1 = 2: DRAFT  
P1 = 3: HSD (high speed draft)  
Note:  
The LQ / NLQ selection becomes active if  
a LQ-/ NLQ-font is selected.  
Draft / HSD becomes active if type style  
DATA is selected.  
ESC [ P1 ; P2 SP r  
SM #  
Select Macro and Change Emulation  
P1 = 1: Macro 1  
P1 = 2: Macro 2  
P1 = 3: Macro 3  
P1 = 4: Macro 4  
P2 = 0: no change of emulation  
P2 = 2: IBM ProPrinter Emulation  
P2 = 3: IBM ProPrinter AGM Emulation  
P2 = 4: EPSON Emulation  
E-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 9 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by  
EPSON LQ Emulation Mode (Native Commands)  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC [ P1 ; P2 w  
SNVCT Set National Version and Code Table  
P1 = 1 - 15 national version depending on  
selected character set (see Appendix C Char.  
Set Tables)  
P2 = 3 digit code of the code table (see  
command SCT below)  
P1 for national version EPSON EXT. GCT:  
P1 = 1 : U.S.A  
P1 = 2 : France  
P1 = 3 : Germany  
P1 = 4 : U.K.  
P1 = 5 : Denmark  
P1 = 6 : Sweden  
P1 = 7 : Italy  
P1 = 8 : Spain  
P1 = 9 : Japan  
P1 = 1 0 : Norway  
P1 = 1 1 : Denmark 2  
P1 = 1 2 : Spain 2  
P1 = 1 3 : Latin AM  
P1 = 1 4 : Turkey  
P1 = 1 5 : Legal  
P1 for IBM CODE PAGE:  
P1 for CODE PAGE EE:  
P1 = 1 : CP 437  
P1 = 2 : CP 850  
P1 = 3 : CP 860  
P1 = 4 : CP 863  
P1 = 5 : CP 865  
P1 = 6 : CP 858  
P1 = 1 : CP 437 GK  
P1 = 2 : CP 851 GK  
P1 = 3 : CP 928 GK  
P1 = 4 : CP 855 CYRI  
P1 = 5 : CP 866  
P1 = 6 : CP 869  
P1 = 7 : CP 852  
P1 for CODE PAGE EE2:  
P1 = 1 : CP 771  
P1 = 2 : CP 773  
P1 = 3 : CP 774  
P1 = 4 : CP 775  
P1 = 8 : KAMENICKY  
P1 = 9 : ISO LATIN 2  
P1 = 1 0 : MAZOVIA  
P1 = 1 1 : CP 437 HUN  
P1 = 1 2 : CP 852 SEE  
P1 = 1 3 : CP 866 LAT  
P1 = 1 4 : WIN LAT2  
P1 = 5 : CP BALTIC RIM  
ESC [ ; P2 w  
SCT  
Set Code Table  
P2 = 3 bit code of the code table  
P2 = 0 3 1 : ISO 8859/1; LATIN 1  
P2 = 0 3 1 : ISO 8859/15; LATIN 9  
P2 = 0 6 1 : IBM Set 1  
P2 = 0 6 2 : IBM Set 2  
P2 = 0 6 3 : IBM Code Page 1)  
P2 = 0 7 1 : EPSON Ext. G. C. T  
P2 = 1 0 0 : CODE PAGES EE  
P2 = 1 0 1 : CODE PAGES EE2  
1) depending on selected character set (P1 in SNV) the IBM CODE PAGE 437, 850,  
860, 863, 865, or 858 (P1 = 6; P2 = 63) will be activated!  
E-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Table 9 (Cont.): Further Control Sequences, supported by  
EPSON LQ Emulation Mode (Native Commands)  
Escape Sequence  
Mnemonic Function  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 SP z  
see Appendix F  
BH  
Barcode Header  
BARCODE Programming  
P2: Barcode type  
P3: Height of barcode  
P4: Width of the thin bars  
P5: Width of the thin gaps  
P6: Ratio width to thin (bars / gaps)  
P7: Uni-directional or bi-directional  
printing  
0 : or not programmed: means no  
changes  
1 : uni-directional printing in LQ  
2 : bi-directional printing in LQ  
3 : uni-directional printing in NLQ  
4 : bi-directional printing in NLQ  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
SMBC  
RSBC  
Set Mode Barcode  
Reset Mode Barcode  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
E-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Hex Code  
Format  
Page  
00  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
11  
12  
13  
14  
18  
1B  
20  
7F  
Null  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
Backspace  
Horizontal Tab  
Line Feed  
Vertical Tab  
Form Feed  
Cariage Return  
Select Printer  
Cancel Condensed Mode  
Deselect Printer  
Cancel Double Width  
Cancel Buffer  
Escape  
Space  
Delete  
1B 0E or 0E  
1B 0F or 0F  
1B 23  
Select Double Width for One Line  
Select Condensed Mode  
Cancel Most Significant Bit Control  
Set Line Space to 1/8 "  
Set Line Space to 1/6 "  
Set Italics  
E-2/6  
E-2/6  
E-2  
1B 30  
E-3  
1B 32  
E-3  
1B 34  
E-8  
1B 35  
Cancel Italics  
E-8  
1B 36  
Enlarge Print Code Area  
Enable Upper Control Code Area  
E-15  
E-15  
1B 37  
1B 3C  
Select Unidirectional Mode (one line) E-8  
1B 3D  
Set Most Significant Bit to 0  
Set Most Significant Bit to 1  
Initialize Printer  
E-2  
E-2  
E-2  
E-9  
E-9  
1B 3E  
1B 40  
1B 45  
Select Emphasized (bold)  
Cancel Emphasized  
1B 46  
E-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Hex Code  
Format  
Page  
1B 47  
1B 48  
1B 4D  
1B 4F  
1B 50  
1B 54  
1B 67  
24 24  
Select Double Strike (bold)  
Cancel Double Strike  
E-9  
E-9  
Select Elite (12 cpi)  
E-9  
Cancel Automatic Perforation Skip  
Select Pica (10 cpi)  
E-3  
E-9  
Cancel Superscript/Subscript  
Select Pitch 15 cpi  
E-9  
E-10  
E-20  
E-20  
Control String Introducer for ESC [  
Control String Introducer for ESC  
24 24 2F  
1B 19 P1  
1B 20 P1  
1B 21 P1  
1B 25 00  
Form Feed  
E-4  
E-6  
E-6  
Select Intercharacter Space  
Select Multible Print Mode  
/
1B 25 01  
1B 2D 00  
Select Standard- / User Defined Char. E-6  
Set  
1B 2B P1  
1B 2E P1  
1B 2D 01  
1B 33 P1  
1B 41 P1  
1B 42 00  
1B 43 P1  
1B 44 00  
1B 4A P1  
1B 4E P1  
1B 51 P1  
1B 52 P1  
1B 53 00  
1B 55 00  
1B 57 00  
1B 61 P1  
Set line Space to P1  
/
"
E-3  
E-4  
E-8  
E-3  
E-3  
E-3  
E-3  
E-8  
E-3  
E-3  
E-9  
E-15  
E-9  
360  
Select Variable Tab Channel  
Select / Cancel Underline  
/
Set Line Space to P1  
/
"
180  
Set line Space to P1  
/
"
60  
Clear Vertical Tabs  
Set Form Length in Lines  
Clear Horizontal Tabs  
Perform P1  
/180 Line Feed  
Set Automatic Perforation Skip  
Set Right Margin  
Set National Version  
/
/
/
1B 53 01  
1B 55 01  
1B 57 01  
Select Superscript / Subscript  
Cancel / Select Unidirectional Printing E-9  
Cancel / Select Double Width  
Select Justification  
E-9  
E-9  
E-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Hex Code  
Format  
Page  
1B 6A P1  
1B 6B P1  
1B 6C P1  
1B 70 00  
1B 71 P1  
1B 74 P1  
Perform P1  
/
180 Reverse Line Feed  
E-4  
Select Font  
E-10  
E-10  
E-10  
E-10  
Set Left Margin  
/
/
1B 70 01  
1B 77 01  
Cancel / Select Proportional  
Select Character Style  
Select Character Table  
E-15  
E-18  
1B 77 00  
1B 78 P1  
Cancel / Select Double Height  
Select Character Quality  
E-11  
E-11  
1B 24 P1 P2  
Set Absolute Horizontal Position  
Define User Defined Characters  
Select Line Marking  
E-6  
1B 26 00 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 data  
1B 28 2D P1 P2 P3 P4 P5  
1B 28 43 P1 P2 P3  
1B 28 47 P1 P2  
E-7  
E-8  
Set Page Length in defined Unit  
Select Graphics Mode  
E-16  
E-19  
E-17  
E-16  
E-16  
E-18  
E-16  
E-19  
E-14  
E-19  
E-8  
1B 28 55 P1 P2  
Set Unit  
1B 28 56 P1 P2 P3  
1B 28 63 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5  
1B 28 74 P1 P2 P3 P4  
1B 28 76 P1 P2 P3  
1B 28 5E P1 P2  
Set absolute vertical Print Position  
Set Page Format  
Assign Character Table  
Set relative vertical Print Position  
Print Data as Character  
Select Various Graphics Modes  
Print Raster Graphics  
1B 2A P1 P2 P3 data  
1B 2E P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6  
1B 3A 00 P1 00  
Copy ROM Character Set to RAM  
Reassign Graphics Mode K  
Reassign Graphics Mode L  
Reassign Graphics Mode Y  
Reassign Graphics Mode Z  
Set Vertical Tabs  
1B 3E 4B P1  
E-13  
E-13  
E-13  
E-13  
E-3  
1B 3E 4C P1  
1B 3E 59 P1  
1B 3E 5A P1  
1B 42 P1....P16 00  
1B 43 00 P1  
Set form Length in Inches  
Set Horizontal Tabs  
E-3  
1B 44 P1 P2...P32 00  
E-9  
E-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Hex Code  
Format  
Page  
1B 4B P2 P3 data  
1B 4C P2 P3 data  
1B 58 P1 P2 P3  
Standard Density Graphics Mode  
Double Density Graphics Mode  
Select Font by Pitch and Point  
E-13  
E-13  
E-13  
1B 59 P2 P3 data  
1B 5A P2 P3 data  
1B 5B 3B P2 73  
1B 5B 3B P2 77  
Double Speed & Double Density Graph. Mode E-13  
Quadruple Density Graphics Mode  
AGC / PCC Procedure  
Set Code Table  
E-13  
E-5  
E-21  
E-22  
1B 5B 3B P2 3B P3 3B P4 3B P5 3B Barcode Printing  
P6 3B P7 20 7A  
1B 5B 3C 73  
Eject Form  
Insert Form  
E-20  
E-20  
1B 5B 3E 73  
1B 5B 3E P1 3B P2 3B P3 3B P4 73  
1B 5B 3E 30 68  
Select Paper Source and Insert Form E-4  
Set Mode Barcode  
Reset Mode Barcode  
Select Print Quality  
E-22  
1B 5B 3E 30 6C  
1B 5B P1 20 58  
E-22  
E-20  
1B 5B P1 3B P2 20 72  
1B 5B P1 3B P2 20 42  
1B 5B P1 3B P2 77  
1B 5B P1 3B P2 78  
1B 5B P1 77  
Select Makro and Change Emulation E-20  
Graphic Size Modification E-11  
Set National Version and Code Table E-21  
Select Font and Character Pitch  
Set National Version  
E-12  
E-21  
E-6  
1B 5C P1 P2  
Set Relative Horizontal Position  
Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel P1  
Set Vertical Tab in Channel P1  
1B 62 P1 00  
E-4  
1B 62 m P1 P2...P9 00  
E-4  
1B 63 P1 P2  
Set Horizontal Motion Index (HMI)  
E-17  
E-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E EPSON LQ 2550 and ESC/P2 Quick Reference  
Hex - Decimal Conversion Table  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240  
97 113 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 241  
98 114 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 242  
99 115 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 243  
2
3
4
84 100 116 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244  
85 101 117 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245  
86 102 118 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246  
87 103 119 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247  
88 104 120 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248  
89 105 121 137 153 269 185 201 217 233 249  
90 106 122 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250  
91 107 123 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251  
92 108 124 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252  
93 109 125 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 253  
94 110 126 142 158 174 190 206 222 238 254  
95 111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
E-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
1. Introduction  
The barcode print facility is available in all three emulations.  
2. Programming  
There are three escape sequences to print barcodes  
- The first sequence is to define the Barcode Header. The type of barcode as  
well as all parameters are selected by a header. The header does not affect  
any parameters outside the barcode application and remains valid until  
another header is transmitted or the printer is turned off. This can be done at  
any time but before barcode printing.  
The header has the following format:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
Note: 8 = Space  
- In step two, the ESC-sequence "Set Mode Barcode (SMBC)" starts the  
barcode printing.  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
- Finally, the ESC-sequence "Reset Mode Barcode (RMBC)" will stop printing.  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Note: Between SMBC and RMBC are only printable characters tolerated (no CR  
or LF).  
2.1 Barcode Header  
Format Function/Parameter  
Hex Code  
BH  
Barcode Header  
P2 = Barcode type;  
1B 5B 3B P2 3B P3 3B P4  
3B P5 3B P6 3B P7 20 7A  
P3 = Height of barcode;  
P4 = Width of thin bars;  
P5 = Width of thin gaps;  
P6 = Ratio width to height;  
P7 = Uni/Bidirectional printing  
SMBC  
RMBC  
Start of Barcode  
Stop Barcode  
1B 5B 3F 30 68  
1B 5B 3F 30 6C  
F-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Header Parameters  
P2 Barcode type  
- default = 101 (Code 39 horizontal)  
Type  
horizontal  
horizontal +  
human  
vertical  
vertical +  
human  
readable text  
readable text  
Code 39  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
301  
302  
303  
304  
401  
402  
403  
404  
2 of 5 industrial  
2 or 5 interleaved  
Codabar (Monarch)  
EAN 8  
not applicable not applicable  
not applicable not applicable  
EAN 13  
Code 93  
307  
308  
407  
408  
MSI Mod 10/10  
UPC-E  
not applicable not applicable  
not applicable not applicable  
UPC-A  
Code 128 (EAN 128)  
Postnet  
311  
411  
not applicable not applicable not applicable  
not applicable not applicable not applicable  
KIX Code  
113  
P3 Height of barcode  
default: 3/12" - 0.64 cm  
-
All characters in a line are automatically repeated according to the selected  
barcode height. This is also true for plain text!  
-
-
P3 * 1/12"  
possible values from:  
0 to 40 (30H to 34H30H) or (48D to 52D48D) for vertical barcodes  
0 to 99 (30H to 39H39H) or (48D to 57D57D) for horizontal barcodes  
Barcode Height in % of  
barcode length  
minimum height  
in mm  
Code 39  
Codabar  
Code 93  
Code 128  
25  
25  
15  
15  
20 (0.8")  
20 (0.8")  
6.25 (0.25")  
6.25 (0.25")  
F-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
P4 Width of the thin bars (default: 2/144" = 0.35 mm)  
Note: The width of bars and gaps should be equal. For this, the parameters P4  
and P5 should not deviate more than one step.  
for horizontal Barcode  
P4  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
hex  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
dec  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
inch  
mm  
0,35  
0,53  
0,70  
0,88  
1,05  
1,23  
1,41  
1,58  
2/144  
3/144  
4/144  
5/144  
6/144  
7/144  
8/144  
9/144  
for vertical Barcode  
P4  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
hex  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
dec  
inch  
mm  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
2/180  
3/180  
4/180  
5/180  
6/180  
7/180  
8/180  
9/180  
0,28  
0,42  
0,56  
0,70  
0,85  
0,99  
1,12  
1,27  
P5 Width of the thin gaps (default: 2/144" = 0.35 mm)  
The values are the same as in P4  
F-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
P6 Ratio Width to Thin (default: 0 (2 to 1))  
Code 39  
2 of 5 industrial  
2 of 5 interleaved  
Codabar  
EAN 8  
P6  
EAN 13  
UPC-A  
UPC-E  
value  
Code 93  
MSI mod 10/10  
Code 128  
0
1
2
3
2.0 to 1  
2.5 to 1  
3.0 to 1  
3.5 to 1  
SC3  
SC6  
SC9  
SC3  
Note: Code 93, MSI 10/10, Code 128 are fixed 2.0 to 1  
Best results for Code 39, 2 of 5 industrial, 2 of 5 interleaved, and Codabar  
with 2.5 to 1  
P7 Uni-directional or bi-directional printing - standard 0 uni-directional  
values are:  
0 or not programmed means no changes  
1 uni-directional printing in LQ  
2 bi-directional printing in LQ  
3 uni-directional printing in NLQ  
4 bi-directional printing in NLQ  
Note: A switch from uni-directional to bi-directional printing is only possible if the  
parameter UNI-DIRECT.CMD is set to YES via operator panel or  
ESC-sequence.  
Start Position of Barcode Printing  
The start position for barcode printing is the current print position.  
For both horizontal and vertical printing, the print position after printing barcodes  
is the same line as the start position next to the barcode printed.  
F-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
2.2 Barcode Programming Examples  
Note: All examples are coded in standard uni-directional printing - that means the  
parameter "P7" is not used.  
In the following examples, 8 stands for "Space".  
The small square  
before and after the printed barcode indicates the  
actual print position.  
Between Start Barcode and Stop Barcode are only printable characters  
tolerated (no CR or LF).  
Barcode Example for Code 39  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 201 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ; 1; 8 z  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
* C 8 O 8 D 8 E 8 8 8 3 9 *  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Barcode Example for 2 of 5 Industrial  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 202 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ; 1; 8 z  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ;  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
F-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for 2 of 5 Interleaved  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 203 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ; 1; 8 z  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ;  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Barcode Example for Codabar (Monarch)  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 204 ; 8 ; 1 ; 1 ; 1; 8 z  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
a 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 t  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
F-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for EAN 8  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 205 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
4 0 1 2 3 4 5 5  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Barcode Example for EAN 8 ADD-2  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 205 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
4 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 1 2  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
F-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for EAN 8 ADD-5  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 205 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
4 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 8 6 1 0 4  
Stop Barcode:  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Barcode Example for EAN 13  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 206 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 8  
Stop Barcode:  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
F-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for EAN 13 ADD-2  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 206 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 8 1 2  
Stop Barcode:  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Barcode Example for EAN 13 ADD-5  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 206 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 8 8 6 1 0 4  
Stop Barcode:  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
F-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for Code 93  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 207 ; 8; 1 ; 1 ;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
a C + O + D + E 8 9 3 W I e  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Barcode Example for MSI Mod 10/10  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 208 ; 8; 1 ; 1 ;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 1 ;  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
F-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for UPC-E  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 209 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 5  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
Barcode Example for UPC-E ADD-2  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 209 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 1 2  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
F-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for UPC-E ADD-5  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 209 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 8 6 1 0 4  
Stop Barcode:  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
Barcode Example for UPC-A  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 210 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 5  
Stop Barcode:  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
F-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for UPC-A ADD-2  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 210 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 5 1 2  
Stop Barcode:  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Barcode Example for UPC-A ADD-5  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 210 ; 8;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
; 1 ; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 5 8 6 1 0 4  
Stop Barcode:  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
8 6 1 0 4  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0  
F-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for Code 128  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 211 ; 8; 1 ; 1 ;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
C o d e 8 1 2 8  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Barcode Example for Code 128 using FNC1 = Coding ] C 1  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 211 ; 8; 1 ; 1 ;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
] C 1 0 0 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5  
Stop Barcode:  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
F-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Barcode Example for POSTNET  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 112 ; ;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
;
; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Data:  
CR LF LF  
Mark Pollan CR LF  
101 Main St CR LF  
Anytown US 12345-6789  
Mark Pollan  
101 main St  
Anytown US 12345-6789  
Barcode Example for KIX - PTT, Post Nederland  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 113 ; ;  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
;
;
; 8 z  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
F-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Programming two Barcodes symbols on the same line  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 201 ; 7; 0 ; 0 ; 1 ; 8 z  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
* C 8 O 8 D 8 E 8 8 8 3 9 *  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Blank zone  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
8 8 8  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
* C 8 O 8 D 8 E 8 8 8 3 9 *  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
F-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Programming two Barcodes symbols separated by CR and LF  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 201 ; 7; 0 ; 0 ; 1 ; 8 z  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
* C 8 O 8 D 8 E 8 8 8 3 9 *  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Blank zone:  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
CR LF LF LF LF LF LF LF  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
* C 8 O 8 D 8 E 8 8 8 3 9 *  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
* C O D E  
3 9 *  
* C O D E  
3 9 *  
F-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Programming two Barcodes symbols in landscape on the same line  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 401 ; 7; 0 ; 0 ; 1 ; 8 z  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
* C 8 O 8 D 8 E 8 8 8 3 9 *  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Blank zone:  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
8 8 8  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
* C 8 O 8 D 8 E 8 8 8 3 9 *  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
F-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F Barcode Quick Reference  
Programming two Barcodes symbols in landscape separated by CR / LF  
Barcode Header:  
ESC [ ; P2 ; P3 ; P4 ; P5 ; P6 ; P7 8 z  
ESC [ ; 401 ; 7; 0 ; 0 ; 1 ; 8 z  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
* C 8 O 8 D 8 E 8 8 8 3 9 *  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
Blank zone:  
Start Barcode:  
Data:  
CR LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF  
ESC [ ? 0 h  
* C 8 O 8 D 8 E 8 8 8 3 9 *  
ESC [ ? 0 l  
Stop Barcode:  
F-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix G Information for the System Manager  
Reset off Menu Access  
To reactivate the menu access function, perform the following steps:  
S Switch off the printer. Press the  
and  
keys simultaneously. While  
holding down the two keys, switch on the printer. When the message MENU  
ACCESS (MENUE SICHERN) is displayed, release the keys. Now you are  
able to change the menu access function. If the new setting is supposed to be  
permanent, don't forget the SAVE function.  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix G Information for the System Manager  
Reset off Menu Access  
To reactivate the menu access function, perform the following steps:  
S Switch off the printer. Press the  
and  
keys simultaneously. While  
holding down the two keys, switch on the printer. When the message MENU  
ACCESS (MENUE SICHERN) is displayed, release the keys. Now you are  
able to change the menu access function. If the new setting is supposed to be  
permanent, don't forget the SAVE function.  
Printer drivers  
The printer drivers for Windows 3.x, 95, 98, NT 4.0 are available.  
(see CD-ROM).  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Milwaukee Impact Driver 2653 20 User Manual
Multiquip Portable Generator EGC1500C User Manual
Multi Tech Systems Network Card MT5634MSV User Manual
National Instruments Home Theater Server 321906B 01 User Manual
NEC Computer Monitor XP29 XM29 Plus User Manual
Olympia Cash Register CM 701 User Manual
Oreck Vacuum Cleaner XL3600RH User Manual
Panasonic VCR AJ HD3700B User Manual
Pass Labs Stereo Amplifier X6005 User Manual
Patton electronic Network Card 07M2160 GS User Manual